5CO02 1 And 2
an article which will make you and your team mre productive.pdf
36 PROFESSIONAL MANAGER WINTER 2018
Psychological goal-setting
1Use the brain’s unconscious biases for goal-setting. When thinking about a deadline, tell yourself it’s ‘X days away’, rather than a number of weeks, months or years.
“If the future doesn’t feel imminent, then people won’t start working on their
goals,” Daphna Oyserman, a researcher who studies the phenomenon, explains. “When I use days rather than years… it feels like the future is closer.”
Another brain hack: when planning for a long-term goal, start by imagining the end result and then work backwards
to fi gure out the steps you need to take to accomplish it. Taking this approach, rather than planning ahead, from where you are now makes it signifi cantly more likely you’ll succeed.
Is that rational? Not in the slightest. But science does suggest it will help you be more productive.
WOR DS / J E S SIC A STILL M A N, EM ILY HILL , G A BR IELLE L A N E
This article will make
you more productive
13 stress-tested work hacks to boost the output of you and your team IK
O N
IM A
G ES
, S H
U T
T ER
ST O
C K
10 MINUTE READ
PROFESSIONAL MANAGER WINTER 2018 37
PRODUCTIVITY
Pre-work leisure
2Having fun fi rst and starting work later could boost productivity. In a series of
experiments that asked volunteers to either complete arduous tasks before relaxing with an enjoyable game or treat, or doing those two things the other way around, University of Chicago social psychologist Ed O’Brien and his colleagues found that play before work helps people avoid burnout and perform better in the medium and long term.
“Leisure improves our work,” O’Brien insists in a write-up of his team’s research for Harvard Business Review. “People often work better and are more satisfi ed with their jobs after returning from restful breaks. Enjoying work also helps people stick to longer-term goals.
“If people… fail to take advantage of such leisure opportunities, [they] end up feeling burned out or dissatisfi ed at work,” he warns.
So, if you want to get more done, stop saving up all your fun for the weekend and consider scheduling in a pleasurable pre-work activity or two during the week. You’ll be happier and achieve more too.
Boost your productivity by
scheduling in some fun activities
before work
38 PROFESSIONAL MANAGER WINTER 2018
Neuro-friendly walks
4When our productivity is held up by the lack of a good idea, we tell ourselves we’re ‘stuck’ or we have some kind of ‘block’. These physical metaphors suggest being pinned down or unable to move. Physical activity can help get ideas flowing again.
Walking is a form of exercise that demands some of our attention, leaving us with enough
mental horsepower to continue processing difficult problems while we take in the passing sights and sounds. Studies have linked this half-absorbed mental state, in which our thoughts are divided between the inner and outer worlds, to creative breakthroughs.
Intellectual greats, from Beethoven and Darwin to Thoreau and Dickens, were known to take regular walks to spur their thinking.
Well-timed breaks
3Your brain is not built for hours of ongoing knowledge work. Regular breaks improve productivity.
Robert Pozen, senior lecturer at the MIT Sloan School of Management, suggests pausing workflow every 75-90 minutes. “That’s the period of time where you can concentrate and get a lot of work done,” he has said. “We have studied professional musicians, who are most productive when they practise for this amount of time.”
A study by software company Draugiem Group, using precise time-tracking, came up with a slightly different ratio of work to rest – the ideal, they found, is to alternate 52 minutes of intense effort with 17 minutes of relaxation.
“Productive employees get the most done during comparatively short periods [because] they’re treated as sprints for which they’re well rested,” the company said.
Whether you opt for blocks of 52, 75 or 90 minutes, the underlying point is the same: find the rhythm of effort and recovery that works best for you and your team. Just don’t try to power through the entire day without taking enough breaks.
Albert Einstein was a committed walker. Could this have helped boost his memory, creativity and problem- solving ability?
PROFESSIONAL MANAGER WINTER 2018 39
PRODUCTIVITY
Cut-throat focus
6 “It’s easy to become a ‘busy fool’, improving processes and gaining efficiency improvements with a scattergun approach. What is really needed is to focus on the areas that limit total output and affect the bottom line.” That’s the experience of David Broadhead, managing director of Partners in Management.
Once business leaders have identified a bottleneck, they should alleviate it by whatever means appropriate and then look for the next developing bottleneck. “Participants on our CMI-recognised 21st Century Leaders programme are encouraged to practically apply the theory, and we have seen some highly beneficial results,” Broadhead explains.
Scientific naps
5“In a knowledge-based economy that depends on sharp minds, a few minutes of shut-eye could be good for business,” Harvard Medical School sleep researcher Robert Stickgold argues.
Science shows that naps drastically boost the retention of newly learned material, improve cognitive function and creativity, sharpen motor skills, and beat caffeine for improving performance. No wonder leading companies such as Zappos, Google and Nike provide comfortable facilities for their employees to sleep on the job.
That might be a step too far for your company, but simply announcing that napping is no longer frowned upon is a free way to boost productivity.
For the first 30 minutes or so of a nap, we sleep relatively lightly and can wake up without grogginess. Nap longer than that and you fall into a deeper sleep and feel foggy-headed on waking. Therefore, unless you have 90 minutes to
spare, that means quick naps of less than half an hour are usually best.
Drinking tea or coffee immediately before closing your eyes will ensure you’ll awake bright-eyed around 20 minutes later when the caffeine kicks in.
Sleep on the job, urges media mogul Arianna Huf f ington, who once collapsed from exhaustion
SH U
T T
ER ST
O C
K, A
LA M
Y, T
H E
SL EE
P RE
V O
LU TI
O N
B Y
A RI
A N
N A
H U
FF IN
G TO
N (
W H
A LL
EN , £
8. 99
)
Focus on overcoming one obstacle at a time
40 PROFESSIONAL MANAGER WINTER 2018
First your employer g ives you wearable tech. The next thing you know...
Email denial (yes, really)
7 On average, emails are opened six seconds after they arrive. Yet it takes 25 minutes for employees to return to maximum productivity after opening them, according to New York University professor Adam Alter. Therefore, make like Chartered Manager Andrew Hacquoil MCMI and turn off inbox notifications.
“My best productivity tip is ‘Rule your inbox to stop it ruling you’,” he says. “If you turn off alerts, you can choose when you look at your messages.” When he does look at his inbox, he recommends doing something with every email to maintain workflow. “Decide to ‘do this now’, delegate it immediately, do it much later or simply delete.” A synced calendar helps him compile a to-do list of dated tasks.
Your email strategy can help you manage others too. “Follow up with those you’ve asked to do something quickly and easily by adding the relevant sent items to your inbox,” he says.
PROFESSIONAL MANAGER WINTER 2018 41
PRODUCTIVITY
Make use of wearable tech
8 At its most controversial, wearable tech could mean managers hire only the most productive individuals. That’s an argument put forward by Dr Chris Brauer, director of innovation at the Institute of Management Services at Goldsmiths, University of London. He has suggested that data from devices worn to measure physical and emotional performance could be used to create “biometric CVs”.
At present, some companies give fitness trackers to employees that measure levels of movement in order to boost health. In the US, up to 13 million trackers are already incorporated into corporate wellness plans, according to market-intelligence firm ABI Research.
Embracing wearable devices In 2015, research by PwC showed that only four in ten employees would use a smartwatch given to them by their employers. This figure rose to more than half (56 per cent) if people knew the information would be used to improve their wellbeing at work. The practice could improve productivity by emphasising wellbeing and decreasing employee absence: according to the Office for National Statistics, about 137 million working days were lost to illness or injury in 2016.
More sophisticated devices could boost productivity by flagging effective relationships between employees. In 2009, staff at a Bank of America call centre were monitored while wearing ‘sociometric badges’ provided by Humanyze. The badge features a microphone for real-time voice analysis, a tracking device, a bluetooth sensor to record proximity to others and a movement sensor to track activity.
Staff were monitored for six weeks and results showed the most sociable workers were also the most productive.
A rise in productivity Many companies in the UK seem hesitant to be associated with wearable tech. When Professional Manager contacted one leading consultancy firm, a spokesperson only returned our call to insist that its UK outpost did not use such devices and had only been involved in a trial study conducted abroad.
Those that have tried it are also somewhat sceptical. In 2014, global media and marketing services company Mindshare worked with Dr Brauer of Goldsmiths to see what happened when its employees wore three different activity trackers – an accelerometer wristband, a portable brainwave monitor or a posture coach. After a month, New Scientist reported, “productivity had risen by 8.5 per cent and job satisfaction by 3.5 per cent overall”. But the technology was not subsequently adopted by the company.
“We came to the conclusion that it wasn’t necessarily better than other programmes that people could sign up to and take part in, like meditation sessions, yoga and subsidised gym membership,” explains Jeremy Pounder, futures director at Mindshare UK.
The legal perspective Mindshare’s view is shared by Carolina Milanesi, consumer tech analyst at Creative Strategies in San Jose, who is currently working at the cutting edge in Silicon Valley. When asked if wearable tech will become a management tool that improves productivity, she replied: “I remain sceptical – mostly because I fear employees’ pushback and issues with insurance, liability and so on.”
Any manager looking to introduce wearable tech in their workforce must indeed consider the legal perspective.
“Any employer processing personal information is subject to a range of obligations – this includes making sure they’re very transparent about what they collect, ensuring they have a legal basis for processing that data,” explains Daniel Cooper, partner at Covington & Burling LLP. “They can only collect what is relevant and proportionate to their purposes.”
Next year, the EU General Data Protection Regulation will come into force. “What is really different…
are the fines,” Cooper explains. “In May 2018, when the law takes effect, the scope for sanctions will be much higher. There’s the potential for companies’ worldwide turnover to be exposed, up to four per cent.”
“Certainly there were [employee] privacy issues,” Pounder adds. “If you look at how the marketplace hasn’t developed in the past few years – those issues that we identified are probably quite common issues.”
While productivity might benefit from wearable tech, it seems widespread adoption will depend on whether managers and their subordinates are ready to embrace it.
Send in your product ivit y t ips to [email protected]
SOME COMPANIES GIVE OUT FITNESS TRACKERS TO BOOST STAFF’S HEALTH
IK O
N IM
A G
ES , S
H U
T T
ER ST
O C
K
42 PROFESSIONAL MANAGER WINTER 2018
9How much you get done is a function of how much enthusiasm you bring to your work. Showing employees how their efforts affect others could boost motivation by up to 20 per cent.
Wharton School professor (and author of the 2017 CMI Management Book of the Year) Adam Grant recruited 71 new employees of an American call centre. During training, half were introduced to a colleague from another department whose salary depended on the revenue generated by the call centre. Half were not. When they hit the phones, those who had met an ‘internal customer’ generated significantly more revenue per shift. The cost to the company was essentially zero.
“These results shocked me,” Grant said. “I had to replicate the study six times before I believed it.” You can significantly increase your team’s productivity by introducing them to someone their work helps. And at little or no cost.
Grid-like lists
10 “Use a prioritisation matrix to assess the urgency and importance of tasks on your to-do list. This really helps to prioritise workloads and helps you to work out which tasks can be delegated to your team,” says Daniel White MCMI.
The ‘Eisenhower matrix’ was devised by the former US president during his time as supreme commander of the Allied forces during the Second World War. There are four categories of task that determine when they should be done, and by whom. First,
urgent and important tasks are critical for success in work and life – they should be done first (they could include an emergency call from a client or handling an employee crisis). Second, not urgent but important tasks will be long-term projects that affect the success of
the business – this could be hiring a new team member. Third, tasks that are urgent but not important are those that can be delegated to employees, such as answering general enquiries. Finally, tasks that are neither important nor urgent, such as mindless internet browsing, should be largely eliminated to free up time.
Research by Masicampo and Baumeister, Consider it Done!, has proved that writing lists of outstanding tasks reduces the intrusive thoughts that arise from our desire to satisfy goals during unrelated tasks.
Meaning ful work
We need meaning at work, says Adam Grant
1DODO IT NOWWrite article for today 2DECIDESCHEDULE A TIME TO DO ITExerciseCall family Long-term strategy
4DELETEELIMINATE ITWatch TVCheck social mediaJunk mail3DELEGATEWHO CAN DO IT FOR YOU?Schedule interviewsBook flights
NOT URGENTURGENT
IM PO
RT AN
T N
O T
IM PO
RT AN
T
Former US president Dwight D Eisenhower used the above matrix to win a war and govern a nation
PROFESSIONAL MANAGER WINTER 2018 43
PRODUCTIVITY
Rebrand stress
11Contrary to popular belief, stress isn’t all bad. It’s your body’s way of preparing you for a challenge: a mild increase in levels of the stress hormones adrenaline and cortisol can increase concentration.
By rethinking how we respond to stress, we can transform it from a problem into a performance booster.
“When you change your mind about stress, you can change your body’s response to it,” says Stanford psychologist Kelly McGonigal. When experiencing a pounding heart and sweaty palms, reminding yourself that your body is on your side can transform how stress aff ects you, McGonigal’s research shows.
Stanford psycholog ist
Kelly McGonigal doesn’t stress
about stress
Stay curious
12 The software giant Oracle has a “learning culture”. At Dropbox, senior leaders hold quarterly book clubs to discuss new business books and ideas. Study after study shows the link between continual learning, acquiring professional and university qualifi cations, and high productivity. Time to upskill those managers?
Stack shelves
13 Reduce the time spent on administrative tasks, such as fi nding items you need often, by keeping multiple versions in diff erent locations – store notebooks in both offi ce drawers and meeting rooms, say. “Put items as close as possible to where you use them,” says Dr Alice Boyes, author of The Anxiety Toolkit.
A LA
M Y,
S H
U T
T ER
ST O
C K,
M A
RK B
EN N
IN G
TO N
Cash flow tips.pdf
I Bill promptly It may be all too easy to be distracted by the next job, but it's important to issue invoices prompdy once work is done. Customers are going to pay only if they actually receive a bill. Consider having a system for sending out invoices, say, within
24 hours of a chargeable event. If you have a system in place for producing immediate invoices, you are arguably also in a better posidon to ask for payment on delivery. Use first-class mail and on very large accounts phone the customer to confirm that invoices have been received.
2 Agree terms upfront If you can get paid when an order is placed, on compledon or delivery, then all the better. But getdng paid so quickly may not always be possible - in which case you should at the very least find out when your customer plans to pay
you. Ideally, you should seek to reach agreement on acceptable payment terms in advance and confirm these in wridng to avoid disputes down the line. Your firm should also have its own defined credit policy, and you should make customers aware of this in the absence of other agreement. When taking on bigger and longer-term projects - or clients - agree a regular payment schedule rather than letdng the full amount build up to compledon of the job.
In the good times, growth was the watchword,
but now cash is king and everybody from the
CEO downwards needs to understand this. For
small and fast-growing firms, not keeping tabs
on cashflow can mean the demise of an
otherwise healthy business. The dicey
economic climate means it is harder than ever
for small firms to get finance and when they do
it often comes at a price, as the cost of loans
continues to soar. If businesses have no cash in
the bank and can't pay their bills, equally hard-
up creditors will consider calling in the
liquidators. What's more, the law's not on your
side: trading while not having a reasonable idea
of how bills are going to be met is unlawful.
Poor management of cashflow is said to be
the prime reason for small firms failing and
more than 10,000 UK businesses fold each
year because of late payment of monies due.
STEVE LODGE presents 20 tips to make sure
you're not one of them
74 m t October 2010 www.managementtoday.com
3 Stalk those payments Chase up monies as soon as payment becomes overdue, and even consider sending a reminder two weeks before the official due date. Maintaining dmely coUecdon pracdces and regular communicadon with your
customers can help avoid problems snowballing, and it is worth planning to accommodate some coUecdon acdvity dme every week.
4 Of fer early-payment incentives Even a discount of 1 % to 2 % might make all the difference. A discount against future work for prompt payers might also be worth considering. A note of caudon, however: bear in mind that some customers
are likely to be good payers regardless, so offering them a discount may fuel more price negodadon.
5 Avoid slow or non-paying customers Do your homework, pardcularly with significant customers. Ask for and check credit references; contact other businesses that have had the same client; consider
paying for a credit check from the likes of Dun & Bradstreet or Experian. Negodate deposits or staged payments for large contracts. If the customer can't even come up with an inidal deposit, it may be worth turning the job down: consider the dme you might have to spend coUecdng payment later.
6 Employ a credit controller Inevitably, there will be customers who won't pay on dme and who seem to pay only when it suits them or after you have hassled them. Having someone on staff with responsibility for reducing overdue monies could
help avoid sales staff putdng reladonships at risk by chasing debts.
7 Cash in your invoices Selling your invoices to a factor means you are paid when the invoice is first presented. The factoring firm then collects payment, which saves you dme on credit control, freeing you up to focus on service and sales. However,
businesses normally receive only 80% or less ofthe value of their invoices upfront - more when the factor receives payment - and typically incur costs of up to 3 % for collecdng the monies, plus an interest charge on the cash advanced.
8 Charge interest on late payments Many businesses see charging interest as a last resort for getdng invoices paid, as they risk losing a customer or precipitadng a dispute widi a
major client for what may be a small amount. Even so, under the 1998 Late Payment of Commercial Debts (Interest) Act, businesses can claim interest on overdue monies at Bank of England base rate plus 8%. Debt recovery costs of up to the equivalent of €40 can also be claimed, although if other businesses in your industry don't charge interest it may not be sensible for you to do so. Go to www.payondme.co.uk for advice.
9 Use cashflow forecasts as a business tool A cashflow forecast should help you idendfy peaks and troughs in your bank balance and so help planning-
pardcularly for borrowing. It should idendfy the source and amounts of cash coming in and the desdnadons and amoimts going out of your business over a period, and be updated in line with actual performance. Accoundng software will do the number-crunching, including what- if calculadons. The key is to use the forecast as a business tool: to give advance warning of potendal cashflow problems and to ensure that you have enough money to pay bills and so avoid late-payment charges. Banks often require a cashflow forecast before considering a loan.
^ ^^\ Dip into your personal savings I I M This is probably the cheapest way to improve I I B cashflow in the short term. While you miss out on B 1 Ä interest on your savings, this cost is likely to be
^ • B ^ ^ ^ ^ much lower than the debt interest your business would be incurring on this funding. Altemadvely, you could draw less money out ofthe business - perhaps by taking a reduced salary.
nLoans for longer-term borrowingsA business loan rather than an overdraft can be sensiblefor longer term borrowings, but make sure you shoparound. Interest (on loans and overdrafts) is tax-deducdble. Consolidating loans can make sense if you have exisdng debt at high rates and will also often improve cashflow by reducing monthly repayments in return for a longer loan term. Consider using a finance broker such as www.simplybusiness.co.uk.
www.managementtoday.com October 2010 m t 75
cashflow tips
Negotiate payment terms with suppliers Ask your suppliers for extended credit terms: giving incentives such as large or regular orders could help. In some cases, buying on sale or return may be
an option. Suppliers could even be open to barter deals, helping your business preserve cash. Some suppliers may also offer a discount for early settlement of bills.
Sciiedule payments to suppliers Unless there is a discount for early payment, in general you should look to pay suppliers as late as possible. Having said that, there may be valued suppliers you want to pay earlier for fear that
they won't deal with you again. Consider arranging a payment schedule that eases the strain on your finances so that all bills aren't due at once.
^y â Use overdrafts and credit cards I M for short-term horrowing I ^ r [ An overdraft is likely to cost more than a loan for I ^ ^ ^ ^ r long-term purchases, but its flexibility - you can
^ ^ H ^ ^ B borrow a precise amount just for the time that you need the cash - makes it good value for shorter-term borrowing. Overdrafts are generally quick to arrange, but exceeding the agreed limit means high charges. Similarly, credit cards can be a blessing to get quick, short-term access to loans. With most credit cards you will have a few weeks in which to pay off your bill before any interest starts accruing. And some cards will have a 0% introductory offer lasting a few months - although if you don't repay your balance at the end of this period, you'll be hit by hefty interest costs.
Keep inventory low Don't buy inventory based on hopes and dreams. Consider, for example, ordering less stock but more often. Use the 80/20 rule - 80% of revenue is generated by 20% of stock items. How much of the
rest can you justify? Be ruthless — wouldn't a choice of 10 widgets priced between lOp and 3 Op be better for both you and your customers than your current range of 3 0? Remember that money spent on stock is cash you can't save - or spend on something else.
^ ^ ^ Stick to budgets I • Know what you're going to spend on company I B ^ ^ ^ % supplies and new equipment and stick to it-don't I I I overspend on non-essentials. Control overheads,
^ H B ^^^0 add employees cautiously (especially given the current economic uncertainty) and make sure staff aren't spending you into difficulties.
^ ^ ^ ^ Lease assets to cut commitment I Ê Leasing gives the use ofan asset without paying for it I Ê all at once - in effect, you pay for the asset with the I m income it generates. It's a rental agreement; almost
• • • * anything can be leased and contracts are flexible and can be tailored to your needs. Lease payments - which are usually fixed, helping cash management - are generally tax-deductible as a business expense, which is handy.
Respond to tax carrots/sticks Many financing arrangements can be treated as business expenses for reducing taxable profits. But there are also other potentially attractive tax breaks such as capital allowances for plant and machinery-
where 100% of cost is tax-deductible in the first year - and the ability to multiply R&D costs by up to 175 % for offsetting against taxable profits, but make sure your R&D falls within the definition. As well as these tax carrots, respecting tax deadlines will save on penalties.
^ ^ ^ ^ Consider the bigger picture II I Selling products that lose money will inevitably put I ^ t a ^ t f l a strain on cashflow and so may make no sense. But I M don't rule out selling offa product line or a highly
^ • B ^^^^ profitable part of your business to improve your overall financial position. Disposing of equity may also be worth considering - but beware of undervaluing your business.
Lead from the front If you are the boss, you can create a mythology around theimportanceofcashmanagement.lt worked for legendary GEC boss Lord Weinstock, who was famous for his impromptu
demands for the saving of insignificant sums or quibbling over the price of a few beers on someone's expenses. Of course, his real motivation was not the specific instance but the general principle that the corporate watchword was thrift. It could work for you, too - make a few calls, bend a few ears and the message will spread like wildfire.
76 m t October 2010 www.managementtoday.com
Copyright of Management Today is the property of Haymarket Business Publications Ltd and its content may
not be copied or emailed to multiple sites or posted to a listserv without the copyright holder's express written
permission. However, users may print, download, or email articles for individual use.
CIMA guide_to_the_balanced_scorecard_2005 3.2.pdf
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard
Research Report
A Practitioners’ Report Based on: ‘Shareholder and Stakeholder Approaches to Strategic
Performance Measurement Using the Balanced Scorecard’
By Allan Mackay
Copyright. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior permission of IIBFS.
IIBFS makes no representation and gives no warranty as to the accuracy of the information contained herein and does not accept any responsibility for any errors or inaccuracies in or omissions from this document (whether negligent or otherwise) and IIBFS shall not be liable for any loss or damage howsoever arising as a result of any person acting or refraining from acting in reliance on any information contained herein. No reader should rely on this document as it does not purport to be comprehensive or to render advice. This disclaimer does not purport to exclude any warranties implied by law that may not be lawfully excluded.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard 1
Acknowledgements This guide has its foundations in the research, ‘Shareholder and Stakeholder Approaches to Strategic Performance Measurement Using the Balanced Scorecard’ conducted for The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants Research Foundation* by the International Institute of Banking and Financial Services (IIBFS) at Leeds University. In preparing this text I have drawn heavily on this research. My role has been that of both editor and author and I hope that in preparing the text I have not detracted from the valuable contribution of the original work.
It has been impossible to compile the Practitioner’s Guide without using significant elements of the original text and full recognition for this important work is rightly due to the original researchers, predominantly Phil Aisthorpe. His scholarly contribution made this guide possible and much of his original work is incorporated into the Guide. He was ably supported and mentored by Professor Kevin Keasey, Dr Helen Short, Robert Hudson, Kevin Littler and Jose Perez Vazquez. They are also owed a debt of gratitude. My work has also benefited from the guidance of Professor Kevin Keasey and the patient proof reading and suggestions from Kevin Littler. Dr Phil Barden of The Centre for Performance Management and Innovation assisted me to enter this field and has provided a valuable overview of emerging developments throughout the project.
Leeds October 2004
* The Chartered Institute of Management
Accountants Research Foundation has since
been subsumed into the General Charitable
Trust of the Chartered Institute of
Management Accountants
October 2004
Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. The History and Development of the Scorecard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2. The Balanced Scorecard Explained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3. Scorecard Foundations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4. Building a Balanced Scorecard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5. Communication, Action, Presentation & Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6. Stakeholder Balanced Scorecards: Examples from the Public Sector . . . . . 34
7. Common Threads and Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Appendix 1. The Research Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Appendix 2. Case Study 1 – English Nature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Appendix 3. Case Study 2 – Mersey Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Contents
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard2
Kaplan and Norton’s Balanced Scorecard is a concept still widely used and respected in today’s business environment. What follows, provides guidance and advice on the development and implementation of a Balanced Scorecard for those organisations considering the introduction of a Scorecard or those that have adopted the approach with limited success. It is applicable for both public and commercial enterprises.
The Practitioner’s Guide was written as part of a project receiving financial support from the Chartered Institute of Management Accountants Research Foundation. The project involved reviewing the current academic literature, followed by a telephone survey in which 460 major UK organisations, embracing both the public and commercial sectors, participated.
The telephone survey was the catalyst for a focused postal questionnaire survey of 60 of the organisations developing performance measurement systems. After the telephone survey semi-structured interviews were conducted in 45 of the organisations. Finally, a detailed investigation on a case study basis was carried out at each of ten major respondents.
Historically, the majority of organisations, particularly those in the private sector, have relied on financial and cost accounting measures to assess their performance. Financial measures continue to be of fundamental importance to organisations. However, there is a growing awareness that if an organisation is going to succeed in the contemporary business and political environment, it will have to generate and take account of a wider range of measures, reflecting the requirements of customers, shareholders, employees, and the communities around them.
Traditional financial and cost accounting measures record what has happened in a previous period and are often referred to as ‘lag indicators’. Relying solely on this type of indicator has been likened to ‘steering a ship by its wake’ or ‘driving a car viewing the route through the rear view mirrors’. In the early 1990s there was a growing awareness that organisations needed a wider set of measures, compatible with their increasingly complex operating environments and this was the catalyst that spurred Kaplan and Norton (1991) to develop the Balanced Scorecard.
The original Kaplan and Norton model illustrated leading and lagging indicators in four different perspectives: Financial; Customer; Internal Processes; and Learning and Growth. As Kaplan and Norton state:
‘The name reflected the balance provided between short and long term objectives, between financial and non- financial measures, between lagging and leading indicators, and between external and internal performance perspectives’.
One of the major strengths of the Balanced Scorecard is its adaptability. Indeed, the originators make it clear that their four quadrants are only a template. Although the term, Balanced Scorecard, might conjure up an initial impression of a table of measurements or key performance indicators, it is in fact a process comprising of a number of carefully inter- linked steps. The real power of a properly developed Balanced Scorecard is that it links the performance measures to the organisation’s strategy. Organisations implementing a Scorecard process are forced to think clearly about their purpose or mission; their strategy and who the stakeholders in their organisation are and what their requirements might be. They also need to evaluate quite clearly the time scales in which they hope to achieve their strategic objectives.
The Balanced Scorecard process involves bringing together the key members of an organisation to debate and reach a consensus on the purpose of the organisation, the requirements of its stakeholders and its strategy. By doing so, it moves beyond being a performance measurement tool to also being a useful aid to strategic development.
Many of the early adopters of the system were either large commercial operations in the USA, or organisations with strong American links. Consequently, much of the quite extensive management literature tended to be US-centric and weighted towards commercial organisations.
The research undertaken for The Chartered Institute of Management Accountant Research Foundation (CIMA) by The International Institute of Banking and Financial Services (IIBFS) was therefore specifically designed to provide an insight to management on the application of the Balanced Scorecard process based on the experience of UK organisations. The research also focused on the very important issue of stakeholder participation. The findings of the research indicated increasing stakeholder participation in the Scorecard process within the public sector. Indeed, the research highlighted how the Scorecard could embrace the UK Government’s policies such as the ‘Best Value Regime’ with its requirements to ‘Challenge, Compare, Consult, Compete and Collaborate’.
Preface
● The Introduction to the guidebook describes the research carried out and details Balanced Scorecard utilisation in UK organisations.
● Chapter 1 deals with the history and development of the Balanced Scorecard and the contextual setting of the Scorecard relative to other common performance management and measurement systems.
● Chapter 2 is particularly aimed at the reader who is encountering the Scorecard for the first time and provides a detailed explanation of the major components of a Balanced Scorecard process.
● Chapter 3 describes the foundations to a cohesive and coherent Balanced Scorecard process and highlights the fundamental questions that the organisation must consider.
● Chapter 4 reviews various design and implementation issues and draws heavily on the case studies that formed part of the research conducted by IIBFS, to outline a framework for developing a Scorecard in a commercial organisation.
● Chapter 5 describes the critical issues of launching and communicating the Balanced Scorecard to the members of the organisation and to external stakeholders. It also ‘completes the circle’ by describing the feedback systems that allow the organisation to make refinements, and adapt to changing environments.
● Chapter 6 fills a large gap in the existing literature by focusing on an example of stakeholder inclusion in the Balanced Scorecard. It provides an overview of how a public sector organisation, with a large number of stakeholders, may go about developing a Balanced Scorecard. This chapter overlaps with many of the themes in the preceding chapters but this has been necessary to maintain a cohesive structure useful for practitioner application. If anything, the overlaps reinforce some of the critical requirements for good Scorecard design in private sector organisations. The examples in this chapter are intended to be informative of the Scorecard approach and are not intended to reflect clinical or local authority best practice.
● Chapter 7 highlights some of the key findings from the research and links them to more detailed work by Balanced Scorecard experts. The chapter draws conclusions from the research findings and identifies common threads between the private and public sectors.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard 3
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard4
What is a Balanced Scorecard? Although in recent years few managers will have managed to avoid a discussion of the Balanced Scorecard, many will not have a full understanding of the Balanced Scorecard process, how it works, what resources are required and whether it really is a new approach to performance measurement. The following paragraphs attempt to clarify some of these issues.
Perhaps the most obvious role of the Balanced Scorecard is the ‘Scorecard’ element i.e. to record and clearly illustrate the small number of key measurements (20-25) that allow busy executives to quickly evaluate what is going on in critical areas of their organisation. However, if the Balanced Scorecard is to merit its description as an innovative approach to performance measurement, it has to be much more than a scoring or results recording mechanism.
The use of the word ‘Balanced’ reflects the roots of the Balanced Scorecard in concerns that organisations were giving too much emphasis to short term financial and
budgetary issues. Many business leaders, academics and consultants recognised that a short term financial or budgetary focus could lead to other important, but perhaps longer term issues, such as customer development, changing markets, standards of service and organisational learning, being given insufficient attention or possibly neglected altogether.
In response to those concerns, Kaplan and Norton (1991) formulated an organisation model comprising of four quadrants to represent and focus attention on what they saw as the key components, timescales and perspectives of an organisation’s strategy.
The Kaplan and Norton template, illustrated in Figure 1, suggests that a Balanced Scorecard will comprise of quadrants giving equal consideration to both long term and short term Financial Performance, Customer Issues, Internal Business Processes and Organisational Learning and Growth.
Introduction
Financial
Vision & Strategy Internal Business
Processes Customers
Learning and Growth
Figure 1: The Balanced Scorecard
These quadrants may not be appropriate for all organisations but one of the strengths of the Balanced Scorecard process, which will be discussed in more detail in later chapters, is that organisations have the freedom to use whatever quadrants or perspectives that best suit their environment and strategy.
Perhaps more importantly, and what starts to differentiate a well-constructed Balanced Scorecard from other measurement systems, is that the Scorecard translates the strategy into relevant operational terms and reflects the organisation’s detailed understanding of the causal linkages between measures and quadrants. Further, the Scorecard is groundbreaking in the balance provided by the recording of results achieved (lag indicators) and the illustration of expected results (lead indicators).
The research that underpins this guidebook highlights that the presentation of the key performance measures is only the ‘tip of the iceberg’. Balanced Scorecard users are keen to emphasise that the process of designing a Balanced Scorecard with its debates about goals, quadrants, perspectives and critical measurements, is an extremely useful process of testing the strategy and aligning the organisation behind the strategic goals. The research highlights that a properly executed Balanced Scorecard process requires every level of the organisation to have a clear and agreed understanding of:
● Why the organisation exists – its fundamental goal; ● What the organisation values; ● The organisation’s vision for the future; ● The critical measures that will make a real difference to the
organisation’s performance; ● Who the stakeholders are and how their views can be
collected and reflected in the respective quadrants of a Balanced Scorecard; and
● How the quadrants and measurements link together (causal links) to ensure the organisation moves towards its strategic goals and objectives.
Is the Balanced Scorecard a new process? Some critics have suggested that there is nothing new in looking beyond financial and accounting measures to evaluate an organisation. There is certainly a considerable body of evidence that leading experts, such as Hopwood, Argyris, Ridgway and Parker, were highlighting the inadequacy of ‘single measures of success’ many years before the development of the Balanced Scorecard.
For example, Lee Parker’s (1979) ‘Divisional Performance Measurement: Beyond an Exclusive Profit Test’, suggests that:
‘Further attention could usefully be paid to the development of divisional productivity indices, projected monetary benefits of the maintenance of certain market positions, costs versus benefits of product development, division social accounts for social responsibility, and human resource accounting for aspects such as personnel development, employee turnover, accident frequency etc’.
Hopwood’s (1973) work provides a comprehensive overview of performance measures in an accountancy context and suggests, inter alia:
‘While not denying that management is a multifaceted task, accounting systems do not aim to reflect all of its valued and important variety. Many crucial social behaviours are completely ignored, and although the narrowly economic implications of some others may be reflected, even such a limited representation remains incomplete and invariably occurs with a delay. But more than being partial, behaviours intended to improve the accounting indices can actually conflict with other equally necessary behaviours’.
In a similar vein, Ridgway (1956) also describes how measures need to be weighted in order to:
‘adequately balance the stress on the contradictory objectives or criteria by which performance of a particular organisation is appraised’.
There is no doubt that this body of work by established scholars, reflects the concerns that may eventually have provided the catalyst for the development of the Balanced Scorecard. It may also be argued that a diligent and well-read manager could have pieced all of this work together and developed a balanced performance measurement system. However, it can equally be argued it took the Balanced Scorecard to make what was previously implicit, explicit, and in a way that captured the imagination of business leaders and managers.
It may also be argued that the Balanced Scorecard goes beyond the earlier work by taking performance measurement further than the boundaries of accountancy alone, and by bringing focus to the causal links between measures. It makes an explicit link between performance measures and strategy and provides a means for strategy to be translated into operational measures that are relevant to the people tasked with implementing strategy and change.
Olve, Roy and Wetter (1999) capture elements of this debate in their comment that:
‘The scorecard often becomes a catalyst for discussions which actually could have been held without it but which become essential when it is used’.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard 5
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Introduction6
Is it just another management fad? Since its arrival in the United Kingdom in the 1990s the Balanced Scorecard has achieved significant penetration into a wide spectrum of commercial organisations. The growing popularity of the Scorecard has led to an explosion of interest in the use of this procedure, and Appendix 1 to this report highlights how 30% of the top 100 UK Corporates (by market capitalisation) have adopted the Balanced Scorecard.
It is perhaps fair to say that the UK public sector was slower to adopt the Balanced Scorecard process but at the time of this survey 31% of the 51 organisations contacted were using or intending to use the Balanced Scorecard. The current Labour Government’s initiatives for modernisation of the public sector have led to a significant increase in interest in the Balanced Scorecard. Several Government publications have made reference to a Balanced Scorecard approach. For example, the Audit Commission’s website provides a wealth of useful information, examples and a very helpful ‘toolkit’1.
If we accept conference proceedings, books and journal articles as an indicator of interest it would appear that the Balanced Scorecard is gaining an ever-increasing audience and is becoming a familiar tool in the modern manager’s toolkit. With the rapid expansion in the implementation and use of Balanced Scorecards, it has become necessary to determine just how this approach to performance measurement is currently being used in the UK, and to identify and disseminate examples of best practice to aid UK management. This guidebook attempts to fill this gap and provide some of the answers to the above questions.
Does it work? Although any Internet search will reveal a number of qualitative reports on Balanced Scorecard implementation, there is little quantitative evidence from UK organisations directly linking performance improvements and Balanced Scorecard initiatives. Nevertheless, there are a significant number of qualitative reports from satisfied users in both private and public sector organisations2.
1 http:// www.bvps. audit – commission.gov.uk
2 Wisniewski M, (2001), Rigby DK (2001), Goodman (2002), Brooke
(2002) – see bibliography
Frigo (2002) provides an interesting overview of the American Institute of Management Accountants’ 2001 Performance Measurement study which highlighted that Balanced Scorecard users rated their systems as ‘very good’ to ‘excellent’ in supporting management’s objectives, communicating strategy to employees, and supporting innovation. The response to questions about the effectiveness of performance measures saw financial measures receiving high ratings and customer, internal business processes, and learning and growth measures receiving progressively lower ratings. The learning and growth quadrant received the lowest rating and Frigo posits that this is not unexpected and highlights the challenges of measuring intangibles. He reflects that organisations, which relate intangible assets such as human and information capital to the value creation process, are more successful in developing performance measures in those areas. He also notes that many of the Balanced Scorecard users interviewed had ‘significantly improved their customer performance measures by using the Scorecard implementation process as an opportunity to understand customer segments, expectations and value propositions.’
Not all experts support the Balanced Scorecard and some, such as Jensen (2002), contend that it is flawed because it does not actually give managers a score – ‘that is a single- valued measure of how they have performed’. He proposes a process he calls ‘enlightened value maximisation’ and suggests that organisations should ‘define a true (single dimensional) score for measuring performance for the organisation or division (and it must be consistent with the organisation’s strategy). …as long as their score is defined properly, (and for lower levels in the organisation it will generally not be value) this will enhance their contribution to the firm’.
Birchard (1996) suggests that the Balanced Scorecard is believed to be successful because of its ability to define the critical success factors and measures that focus on growth and long term success. However, Birchard also suggests that the Balanced Scorecard may be inappropriate for organisations with short-term financial problems or undergoing restructuring.
Palmer and Parker (2001) provide an interesting and thought provoking perspective by applying ‘physical science uncertainty principles’ to performance measurement systems. Their report suggests that a key factor in developing a successful Balanced Scorecard is the identification of ‘aggregate level measures’ and in support of this argument they use Lucas’s (Lucas 1995) study highlighting the difficulties ‘in developing specific worker level measures that match higher level ones’. They highlight the similarity between the Balanced Scorecard’s focus on critical success factors and examples from Activity Based Management (ABM) which suggest that ‘rather than having accurate product costing as the focus’, organisations can make large gains by identifying and focusing on ‘one or two critical input drivers’. These drivers are very similar to the Balanced Scorecard’s critical success factors, and in terms of physical science uncertainty principles can be represented as ‘strange attractors’3 ‘around which the system can organise itself at a new level of suitability’.
For readers who wish to have more quantitative evidence of the popularity or otherwise of the Balanced Scorecard and other management tools, Bain & Company carry out an annual survey to investigate the experience of companies adopting leading management tools. The results of this survey and other useful information are posted on their web site4.
3 Gleick, James, 1988 ‘Chaos-Making a New Science’, London,
Heinemann
4 http:// www.bain.com
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Introduction 7
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard8
The fundamental principles of financial accounting measurement were first developed centuries ago to support the methods of doing business that were prevalent at that time. The use of financial records has evolved with the development of business structures. Financial measures tend to reflect contemporary organisational thinking and industrialisation and mechanisation have both been strong influences in this regard for most of the 20th century. Since the Industrial Revolution bureaucratisation of the organisation and the division of labour have been dominant themes. As the German sociologist Max Weber (1947) noted: ‘bureaucracy is a form of organisation that exhibits the mechanistic concepts of precision, regularity, reliability and efficiency achieved through the fixed division of tasks and detailed rules and regulations’.
1.1 The Organisation as a Machine The industrial era was the era of the machine and this had a strong influence on accounting methodologies. It was relatively easy to use a machine metaphor to aid understanding of organisations (Morgan, 1997). Such thinking required top-down control, and so classical theorists developed the concept of organisations as rational systems that should be streamlined to operate in as efficient a manner as possible. The emergence of Scientific Management, as pioneered by Frederick Taylor, reinforced the concept of the organisation as a machine. Taylor was an American engineer and is best known for his time-and- motion studies, characterised by detailed observation of all aspects of a work process to find the optimum mode of performance.
These dominant schools of thought had a strong influence on the development of financial and cost accounting protocols. They evolved around issues such as how to deal with the capital cost of tangible assets and with measuring the efficiency of men and machines.
1.2 21st Century Models As we move into the 21st century, the emphasis has moved from tangible assets to knowledge-based strategies founded on intangible assets, and a movement away from top-down strategic formulation. The new business environment of the so-called ‘Information Age’ has become dependent on control of such issues as employee knowledge (Stewart, 1997), organisational empowerment (Simons, 1995), competitive capabilities (Stalk et al, 1992), intangible resources (Hall, 1992), and core competencies (Prahalad and Hamel, 1990). In this regard, the fundamental accounting principle of placing a monetary value on the productive assets of organisations creates increasing difficulty. As Kaplan and Norton point out,
‘Ideally, this financial accounting model should have been expanded to incorporate the valuation of a company’s intangible and intellectual assets … Realistically, however, difficulties in placing a reliable financial value on such assets as … process capabilities, employee skills, motivation … [and] customer loyalty… will likely preclude them from ever being recognised in organisational balance sheets’. (1996a:7)
Additionally, traditional financial accounting methods relate to specified periods of time and accounting systems, even at their most sophisticated, inform management as to how a corporation has performed in accordance with pre- determined standards within a specific period. If management is to lift its vision towards the competitive horizon, it needs to step back from the periodicity of pure accounting measurement. ‘Performance’, in this context, is usually measured in terms of transaction related activity (e.g. sales, direct costs, amortisation, etc.) conducted in the market place and completed within the period under consideration. Transaction dependent measures tend to emphasise the sequential value chain of business functions as products are supplied into a competitive market (Porter, 1985). By contrast, they may fail to recognise the value creating, cross-functional capacities and multi-period processes inherent to the organisation.
Accounting measures may provide little indication of the importance of change programmes undertaken within the organisation that, although not affecting current transaction activity, will have a significant effect on earnings in multiple future periods. Indeed, basing the criteria for performance success on financial results can lead companies to reward inappropriate behaviour by managers. Management may seek to enhance profitability in the current accounting period by eliminating valuable investment programmes and thereby damaging future competitiveness. Historical cost accounting methods have a limited role in forecasting future competitive success. Historical measures, such as Return on Investment (ROI) and Return on Capital Employed (ROCE), are poor tools for plotting the future direction of a company within its main markets and industry sector.
1.3 Tableau de Bord The concept of taking account of more than just financial measures is not new, but it is one that has developed at an increasing pace with the advent of the Information Age. Perhaps the earliest formalised measurement system of this type was the French process of Tableau de Bord that emerged in the early part of the 20th century. Broadly translated from the French, ‘tableau de bord’ means a dashboard, a series of dials giving an overview of a machine’s performance, such as the array of instruments used by car drivers or airline pilots.
The association with machines is not surprising as the system was first evolved by process engineers attempting to evolve their production processes by having a better understanding of the relationships between their actions and process performance; the cause and effect relationship. In an attempt to improve local decision making, the engineers developed separate tableaux for each sub unit that reflected the overall strategic aims of the organisation. As their objective was to study cause and effect relationships, the engineers did not limit their measurements to financial indicators and used a wide range of operational measures to evaluate local actions and impacts.
1. The History and Development of the Balanced Scorecard
Figure 2: The EFQM model
Innovation and Learning
Enablers Results
Leadership
People Management
Processes
People Satisfaction
Policy & Strategy Customer
Satisfaction
Resources Impact on Society
Business Results
Although the Tableau de Bord has been around for over 50 years, it was only in the last quarter of the 20th century that the movement away from reliance on financial measures gained impetus. One of the main catalysts appears to have been increasing global competition.
1.4 The Performance Pyramid McNair et al (1990) designed a model that they called the ‘performance pyramid’ based on the concepts of total quality management. The performance pyramid represents an organisation resolved into four interdependent levels. The first level is the traditional corporate management layer and the second; the company’s sub units. The third level is not a structural business unit but rather is a representation of all the processes that are critical to the organisation’s success – such as creating customer satisfaction. It is from this level that operational goals such as quality and delivery time, are derived. In the performance pyramid model, different measurement frequencies are adopted to meet the perceived requirements of different levels of management.
In the lower, customer facing or operational base of the pyramid, measures are relatively frequent, for example, in units of days or weeks. As we advance up the pyramid through the hierarchical levels of management, measurement frequencies reduce, and the emphasis is on financial measures. One of the strong themes underpinning this model, and one that has a resonance with the Tableau de Bord, is the concept of a strong cause and effect linkage between the lower operational measures and the higher financial measures and the use of the pyramid to illustrate this relationship.
1.5 The EP2M Model Adams & Roberts (1993) progressed the evolution of measurement systems by promoting their use as a means of fostering an organisational culture in which constant change is seen as normal and which has a fundamental requirement for effective measures that can be promptly reviewed and which provide rapid feedback to decision makers. Their model is encapsulated by the formula EP2M: Effective Progress and Performance Measurement, and stresses the importance of measures in four areas:
● External measures customers, markets, suppliers, partners, etc
● Internal measures efficiency and productivity of internal processes
● Top down measures implementing the strategy
● Bottom up measures empowering employees
1.6 The Malcolm Baldridge and EFQM Models Two very similar, and quite prominent, measurement models were developed as a result of USA and European Government initiatives to counter the threatened Japanese domination of global markets. Both schemes feature awards for various classes of organisations. The American scheme is known as the Malcolm Baldridge National Quality award and its European counterpart is the European Foundation for Quality Management’s Business Excellence (EFQM) model. The familiar structure of the latter model is shown in Figure 2.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard 9
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard The History and Development of the Balanced Scorecard10
The Results section of the model describes what the organisation has achieved, and is currently achieving, whereas the Enablers show how those results are being achieved. The Business Excellence model is a way of auditing the performance of the organisation against each of the nine elements shown in Figure 2. Those elements are weighted and the overall score determines how the organisation is performing. The EFQM framework is predominantly used as a means of continuously improving processes, as well as a useful source of benchmarking data.
1.7 Origins of the Balanced Scorecard In 1990, Dr David P. Norton and Professor Robert S. Kaplan conducted a research study project, sponsored by KPMG Peat Marwick, into the performance measurement systems of 12 companies. The emphasis of their research project, entitled ‘Measuring Performance in the Organisation of the Future’, was to investigate and address the limitations of traditional financial based systems for monitoring performance. Focusing on financial measures, it was argued, led companies to focus on the short term and, potentially, left them ill prepared for future competitive engagement.
Over the course of 1990, participants of the research study began to shape out the structure of the Balanced Scorecard. The results of the original study were subsequently published in an article in The Harvard Business Review (Kaplan and Norton, 1992). As corporate interest in their approach increased, Kaplan and Norton were able to further develop their ideas on the design and application of the Balanced Scorecard (Kaplan and Norton, 1992; 1996a-e; Norton, 1997).
Of all the models discussed, the EFQM, Business Excellence Model and the Balanced Scorecard have been the most widely adopted by UK organisations. Each model appears to have its own champions specialising in their implementation and promotion.
1.8 The Balanced Scorecard v The EFQM Model Kaplan and Lamotte (2001) contend that there are five major ways in which the Balanced Scorecard exceeds the Business Excellence model:
● They suggest that the EFQM and Baldridge models verify that a strategy exists and is well followed. However, they contend that the links between the enablers and results are implicit. In contrast, they suggest the process of building tailored Balanced Scorecards gives much more emphasis to cause and effect linkages.
● The EFQM and Baldridge models evaluate internal process performances against benchmarked best practices and, as a result, focus on continuous improvement. In contrast, target setting with the Balanced Scorecard permits aspirations for radical performance allowing Scorecard organisations to become the benchmarks for others.
● Quality Models, such as the EFQM and Baldridge, strive to improve existing organisational practices but applying the Balanced Scorecard often reveals entirely new processes at which an organisation must excel.
● Quality programmes are often referred to as continuous improvement programmes. However, there is a danger with the EFQM and Baldridge models that scarce resources might be expended on incrementally improving inefficient but existing processes. Kaplan and Norton suggest that the Balanced Scorecard is a better tool for prioritising which processes should be allocated resources and which should be dropped.
● The Balanced Scorecard integrates budgeting, resource allocation, target setting, and reporting, and feedback on performance into ongoing management processes. Historically, the EFQM and Baldridge models evaluated and scored leadership and strategy setting as if they were independent processes. With the Balanced Scorecard they are inextricably linked together.
Nevertheless, Kaplan and Lamotte (2001) do concede ‘that each model adds a useful dimension to the other, and in using the two together a management team leverages the knowledge and insights from each approach. Both approaches foster deep dialogues about performance, supported by management processes that link strategy to operations to process quality’.
Key Points:
● Financial models need to reflect contemporary organisational thinking.
● 20th century accounting systems reflected ‘top-down’ control and the influence of tangible assets such as machines.
● 21st century systems need to consider more intangible assets such as employee knowledge, core competencies, etc.
● The Business Excellence model and the Balanced Scorecard complement each other and can be used together to capture the knowledge and insights from each approach.
The Scorecard’s guiding concept is to move managers away from focusing purely on financial outcomes and to consider a more balanced portfolio of multiple financial and non- financial measures closely linked to strategic objectives. After all, no single performance indicator can succinctly capture the complexity of how an entire organisation is performing. The Scorecard encourages managers not to rely solely on historical measures and emphasises the need for ‘lead’ indicators that point to the future direction of the organisation. The key question under consideration becomes less ‘what have we achieved?’ and more ‘what are we likely to achieve in the future?’ Enabled by this change of perspective, the emphasis of the Scorecard approach is to measure the strategic as well as the operational. Scorecard measures are selected to describe and monitor the organisation’s progress in implementing and achieving its strategy. Monitoring these measures enables management to plot the future competitive direction of the organisation. This shift in focus, from operational activity to strategic guidance, has become increasingly important as external competitive environments have become more dynamic and internal organisational structures have become more fluid and complex.
2.1 Balanced Scorecard Quadrants The generic Balanced Scorecard proposed by Kaplan and Norton (1996a) consists of four interrelated quadrants, each containing objectives and measures from a distinct perspective (see Figure 3). These perspectives are termed:
● Financial ● Customer ● Internal Processes ● Learning and Growth
The scope of these perspectives is designed to cover the whole of the organisation’s activities both internally and externally, both current and for the future.
2. The Balanced Scorecard Explained
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard 11
Figure 3 : The Balanced Scorecard Quadrants
Internal View
Financial Objectives and Performance Measures Associated with the Shareholders’ Perception and Expectation of the Organization
Internal Business Processes Objectives and Performance Measures Associated with the Organisation’s Internal Productive Processes
Customer Objectives and Performance Measures Associated with the Customers’ Perception of and Interaction with the Organisation.
External View
D ev
el o
p m
en ta
l Fo
cu s
A ctivities Fo
cu s
Learning and Growth Objectives and Performance Measures Associated with the Development of Enabling Culture and Competencies
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard The Balanced Scorecard Explained12
Once it has been formulated, the organisation’s strategy is translated into specific objectives that can be classified within each of these four perspectives. Once these objectives have been identified, appropriate quantitative measures are
devised to report and monitor the success in achieving these objectives. Table 3 lists examples of objectives and measures that may appear in each of the four measurement perspectives.
Table 3: Examples of Quadrant Objectives and Measures
Learning & Growth Internal Business Processes
Financial Customer
Objectives
‘To value our staff’
‘To maximise productivity’
‘To develop a skilled workforce’
‘To provide internal information’
‘To create organisational alignment’
‘To cultivate a core competence in ...’
Objectives
‘To achieve a higher return on investment’
‘To see significant revenue from our new product launch’
‘To maximise profitability per transaction’
‘To minimise our cost of obtaining funds’
‘To delight our shareholders’
‘To improve our cash flow’
Measures
Employee Retention Index
Output per Head
Number of Training Hours Completed Per Head
Information Availability Survey Index
Peer Evaluation Measures Within / Between Teams
Skill and Technology Measures Related to Desired Competence
Measures
ROI, ROCE
Revenue Growth on Selected Product Lines
Unit Costs
Credit Rating
Value Added Measures
Creditor Days
Objectives
‘To continually challenge competitor products in the market place’
‘To compete on product reliability’
‘To compete on competitive logistics capabilities’
‘To compete on product delivery channel mix’
‘To capture a unique supply chain’
‘To reinvent our value creation system’
Objectives
‘To dominate our major markets’
‘To delight our targeted customers’
‘To increase revenue through repeat purchases’
‘To grow our business in a selected target group’
‘To add margin through image or fashion’
‘To build customer recognition’
Measures
Time to Market for Next Generation of Products
Production Defect Rates
Stock Replenishment Cycle Times
Volumes of Transactions Conducted Through Each of Our Delivery Channels
Percentage of Supplier’s Revenue Dependent on Us
Benchmarking Index for Supplier of Outsourced Activities
Measures
Market Share
Customer Satisfaction Survey Results
Customer Retention Over Time
Customer Acquisition From Target Group
Marketing Spend as a Percentage of Sales
Corporate Image or Brand Awareness Polls
Suggested Measures: Kaplan and Norton (1996a)
2.2 The Financial Quadrant The concept of using a balanced portfolio of both financial and non-financial measures does not detract from the importance of financial outcomes. Financial results have their own, if incomplete, message to tell and Kaplan and Norton (1996) see the Financial quadrant as acting as the focal point or culmination of all the objectives and measures in the other three Scorecard quadrants.
As previously explained, some experts such as Jensen (2002) eschew the Balanced Scorecard in favour of more ‘shareholder value’ oriented models. However, managers are not forced into an ‘either or’ choice because, as Kaplan and Norton suggest, the Balanced Scorecard is a template not a straight jacket. As can be seen from the many examples in this guidebook the Scorecard can be adapted to reflect any strategy and the Financial quadrant can readily accommodate both operational and shareholder derived measures.
It may even be argued that designing a Balanced Scorecard may provide the catalyst that spurs organisations to review their financial measurements and to select those that best reflect their strategy and incentivise their managers to achieve it.
2.2.1 The Public Sector Although experts such as Olve, Roy & Wetter (2001) suggest alternatives to the financial quadrant for public sector bodies, this is not necessarily appropriate. After all, no publicly funded body acts in a financial vacuum and there will be pressure to confirm that ‘value for money’ is being achieved.
This is certainly the case in the current environment with the government appearing to prefer what Moore (1998) describes as:
‘cost effectiveness analysis which find their standard of value not in the way individuals value the consequences of government policy but instead in terms of how well the program or policy meets objectives set by the government itself’.
Unfortunately, although the public sector has well established principles for evaluating public policy in respect of tax choices etc. (Cullis & Jones, 1998), it does not appear to have evolved operational financial measures such as those used by private sector managers and analysts. However, the modern public sector organisation generally has a wealth of data at its disposal that can be converted into financial data and measures that will help to drive the organisation in the direction of its strategy and policy objectives. The research showed that a typical public sector financial quadrant would include measures that indicate:
● Money has been spent as agreed and in accordance with procedures;
● Resources have been used efficiently; and ● Those resources have been used to achieve the intended
result.
The Accounts Commission for Scotland has also developed a very useful guide to designing Scorecards for use in the public sector.5
2.2.2 The Commercial Enterprise The following paragraphs highlight some of the key financial measures that could be used in the financial quadrant of a commercial or ‘for profit’ organisation. The quadrant may include measures that show how well an organisation is being run at the operating level and how well it is being run from the shareholder point of view. Although both perspectives rely on measurements of cash flow and profitability, they will have a different focus. It is likely that operational level analysis would start with operating profit before interest and tax whereas the shareholder analysis is likely to be centred on earnings after all such charges have been included.
There are a plethora of measures and a considerable ongoing debate about the most appropriate financial indicators. The Financial Times’ publication, ‘Financial Performance Measurement and Shareholder Value Explained’ provides a thorough review of the various measures and their respective strengths and weaknesses.6
5 The Measures of Success: Developing a Balanced Scorecard to Measure
Performance.(available on Audit Scotland web site: www.audit-
scotland.gov.uk)
6 Warner,A., Hennel,A. (1998), Financial Performance Measurement and
Shareholder Value Explained,London, Financial Times Management
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard The Balanced Scorecard Explained 13
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard The Balanced Scorecard Explained14
The preceding table highlights that whilst a number of the measures may be useful performance indicators they are of limited use as drivers of shareholder value. Stakeholder ratios can also be resolved into two main groups; ratios derived from the organisation’s accounts and ratios that link the organisation’s accounts and stock market values. The following table gives a brief overview of these measures. For readers wanting a more detailed explanation the Financial Times guide will again prove very useful.
Operational Measures
Ratio
Profit and Return on Sales (ROS) Operating profit/ Sales income
Return on Capital Employed (ROCE) Capital Employed = Fixed Assets + Stock + Debtors – Creditors
Explanation
Perhaps the simplest and most widespread operational measure in the private sector is profit or return on sales (ROS). It is calculated by expressing the operating profit as a percentage of the sales income. Operating or trading profit is simply the monies left once the costs of producing and selling the product have been deducted from the sales income. As all the numbers come from the profit and loss account it is relatively easy to calculate and it can be used by managers to give a high level indication of progress and competitive position.
Return on capital employed is a more comprehensive measure than return on sales as it links the operating profit to the capital invested. The ROCE is calculated by expressing the operating profit as a percentage of the capital employed. The term ‘capital employed’ is not tightly defined and this has given rise a wide range of labels and definitions including return on capital (ROC), return on investment (ROI) and return on net assets (RONA). Although different organisations tailor the definition of capital employed to reflect their particular environment, a simple and robust calculation is provided by the formula opposite.
ROCE, ROI, RONA provide a link between the balance sheet and the profit and loss account and the actions of increasing profit and reducing assets required to increase ROCE should also improve cash flows. However, the use of ROCE/ROI/ RONA ratios have a number of weaknesses that can mislead and distort decision making, particularly when linked to manager reward systems. Emmanuel & Otley (1990) highlight the major difficulties with these ratios and offer a number of alternatives.
Weaknesses
● ROS varies from industry to industry and it can be misleading if used to compare organisations.
● It concentrates solely on the profit and loss account and does not highlight cash flow or balance sheet issues.
● It does not give managers an insight into the investment required to generate the sales, interest paid, or tax issues.
● Increasing ROS does not necessarily lead to the creation of shareholder value.
● ROCE can be very misleading if used to compare organisations or divisions operating in different market segments or areas where differing accounting standards are applied.
● The issues of asset valuation and the treatment of acquired goodwill are problematic and unless fully explored may make valid comparisons very difficult.
● It can encourage managers to favour shorter-term strategies that reduce capital investment with a resulting negative impact on the future of the business.
● It is not a useful measure for organisations with low levels of tangible assets e.g. consultancy firms, recruitment agencies etc.
● There is little correlation between ROCE and shareholder value.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard The Balanced Scorecard Explained 15
Shareholder Ratios
Ratios derived from the Public Accounts
Ratio
Return on Equity (ROE) PAIT/ Ordinary share capital + Reserves
Earnings per Share (EPS) Earnings/Shares
Dividend Cover Earnings/Dividend
Explanation
Return on equity is quite similar to ROCE and is calculated by expressing the annual earnings as a percentage of the shareholders’ equity. The annual earnings are defined as the profit after interest, tax and all charges other than ordinary dividends. In this context equity is defined as the amount of cumulative share capital and retained profits that have been invested in the company since its foundation.
This very popular measure is calculated by expressing the annual earnings as a percentage of the average shares in issue during the year. It is a simple calculation and very much a favourite with stock market analysts and the boards of public companies as it gives a robust indicator of the market’s view of the company.
This is an important measure for shareholders who focus on dividends paid as it highlights the proportion of earnings paid out in dividend. It is usually expressed as a multiple.
Weaknesses
● It is only a useful measure for shareholders who have been with the company since its foundation.
● Like ROCE there can be problems with the valuation of fixed assets and variations in the treatment of goodwill.
● ROE does not take account of share value in the stock market.
● The correlation between ROE and shareholder value is relatively low.
● It is not a useful measure for comparing different companies as different companies are likely to have issued very different numbers of shares.
● It can encourage managers to manage stock market perceptions by holding back on the issue of new shares or by share buyback.
Ratios linked to Stock Market Information Ratios based on stock market information can change every day as prices change to reflect market influences and perceptions. Whilst measures derived from published accounts can be influenced by managers, measures determined by stock market variables are much more difficult to manipulate.
One of the key components of any stock market derived measure is market capitalisation and this can be simply expressed as the product of the total shares issued and the current share price. It is a useful measure as it normally provides the starting point for calculating the sums required for mounting a take-over bid for a public company.
Price to Book Ratio Market capitalisation/Shareholders’ equity
Price Earnings Ratio Current share price/Earnings per share
Dividend Yield Dividend per share/Current share price
The ratio is only useful for comparative purposes in the context of a specific market sector but as a general rule from the shareholder perspective, the higher the multiple, the better.
The price to earnings ratio is usually expressed as a multiple and is probably the most useful comparative measure in the stock market. It provides a useful indicator of future expectations and the higher the multiple the more the market expects of future performance. Price earnings ratios again provide the best comparisons when benchmarked against companies in the same market sector.
The dividend yield is expressed as a percentage. It is important to investors who are more interested in immediate income than capital growth.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard The Balanced Scorecard Explained16
Free Cash Flow Although operational measures take account of operational cash flow, shareholders and analysts are likely to be more interested in full cash flow or, as it is sometimes called, free cash flow. The objective of calculating free cash flows is to assess what is available for shareholders before deciding on the distribution of discretionary profits. According to Hennel and Warner (1998) free cash flow analysis is a useful indicator if a company is generating enough cash to provide future value for its shareholders.
As one might imagine a negative or low cash flow projection may be an indication of trouble ahead. However, capital expenditure and the treatment of goodwill can distort the measure and analysts may attempt to account for any unusual fluctuations and normalise the capital expenditure figure.
A number of financial commentators have attributed the emphasis on cash to concerns and debates about the validity of conventional accounting measures and the issues surrounding the treatment of goodwill in company accounts. As a result of these concerns, analysts and business leaders evolved measures that embrace the more traditional profit indicators, cash flows and shareholder value. Perhaps the most prominent of these measures are economic value added (EVA) and market value added (MVA).
Economic Value Added (EVA) A good basic formula is EVA = Post-tax profit – a charge on capital employed
Although economic value added is heralded as a new measure, it is in reality a long established measure given a new acronym. In its original format the measure was called residual income (RI) and was in fairly widespread use in the USA in the early years of the 20th century. EVA and RI are closely linked by their objective of ensuring that the total costs of resources consumed in the period, including the cost of capital, are included in any profit calculation.
As a result of the focus on the cost of capital the EVA measure is very useful for bringing balance sheet issues into the profit and loss account and consequently raising their profile with managers. Unlike some of the more traditional measures which are expressed as multiples or percentages, EVA is expressed in actual monetary values and consequently can be a very meaningful management objective.
EVA can also be a very useful measure for evaluating whether new opportunities, business streams or investments will add value to a business. It can also send out a strong signal to analysts that the company has a strong focus on preserving or growing shareholder value. However, it is worth noting that despite its many benefits EVA is not a simple measure to understand. There can be a wide variation in the factors included in calculating profit and capital employed. Hennel and Warner (1998) report that a leading consultancy has identified 'a possible 164 adjustments which can be applied to the profit or capital employed numbers before arriving at EVA.’
Market Value Added (MVA) The following formula has been generally accepted: Current MVA = Present value of future EVAs
MVA is similar to both EVA and the price to book ratio. MVA is expressed as a money surplus rather than as a multiple and is a robust measure of value created. It can give a very clear indication of the link between shareholder value and management actions, and is generally accepted as a better indicator of longer term potential than EVA.
Lehn and Makhija (1996) provide a useful overview of EVA and MVA as well as providing an interesting insight by linking EVA and MVA to the rate of removal of Chief Executive Officers. Fera (1997) also provides a good overview of EVA and MVA and how they can be used as a tool for evaluating strategic choices.
2.3 The Customer Quadrant In today’s competitive markets, the key emphasis for most executives will be the customer. Many organisations have taken up the challenge of focusing on customer satisfaction, identifying customer needs and re-engineering their business capabilities from the customer interface. Many of the inspiring mission statements formulated by organisations will emphasise a commitment to delighting the customer at every turn. If these goals are to be achieved in a profitable business context, organisations need to monitor and manage their interaction with their chosen customer base. In the public sector there is, at least conceptually, the requirement for a customer focus and this is clearly outlined in contemporary government policies and their emphasis on stakeholder participation. (Many public sector organisations are uncomfortable with the word ‘customer’ and prefer to think in terms of recipients of their services, citizens, or stakeholders).
The objectives recorded within the Customer quadrant of the Balanced Scorecard may be both contemporary and future orientated. They may relate to both existing and potential customers and markets. Table 3 provides some examples of customer objectives and measures. Measures of customer satisfaction record the success the organisation has achieved to date in pleasing its existing customer base with its products and services. These measures may be collected through appropriate customer surveys. Measures of customer loyalty and retention can provide management with an insight into longer-term trends in its association with these customers. Measures of attitudes towards the organisation and levels of recognition within selected segments of the public can help identify markets for the future.
The key to selecting the most appropriate Customer quadrant objectives and measures is the identification of ‘customer value propositions’ that will meet the needs of chosen customer segments. In his best selling book Competitive Advantage: Creating and Sustaining Superior Performance, management guru Michael Porter states:
‘An organisation’s competitive advantage grows fundamentally out of the value a firm is able to create for its buyers that exceed the firm’s cost of creating it. Value is what buyers are willing to pay’. (Porter, 1985)
Porter (1980; 1985) describes how buyer value is created and imparted into goods and services through an organisation’s value chain and how, in a competitive market, that value is made representative within the price paid at the time of purchase. From the customer’s perspective, however, it should be remembered that ‘value’ is experiential. Public sector organisations also have value chains and ‘leading edge’ thinking in public organisations, such as the NHS, is encouraging health care providers to consider their service as it might be perceived by the patient travelling along the chain. The case study of English Nature in the Appendices, describes how it set about mapping and clarifying its value chain.
A customer’s perception of the value received from the purchase will vary over the consumption lifespan of the product or service in question. The Customer quadrant of the Balanced Scorecard may be used to shed light on the customer’s perception of the ‘value’ they receive from the attributes of the products or services that they purchase or receive.
To achieve sustained competitive success however, companies need to be focusing on far more than their current products and customers. Companies should strive to continually surprise their customers with products which meet needs that they never even knew they had (Hamel and Prahalad, 1996:118). In competing for future success, organisations need to be continually developing the value propositions to be made available to their customers for years to come.
2.4 The Internal Business Processes Quadrant The Internal Business Processes perspective is about ‘doing’. Objectives and measures in this quadrant of the Scorecard focus on the operational aspects of an organisation’s activity. Non-financial measures are commonly used for monitoring operational processes; for example, in terms of quality, timeliness and output volumes. Such measures, in conjunction with activity based costing systems, provide a mechanism for control and improvement of an organisation’s processes. It is in this quadrant that public sector organisations are likely to include measures relating to service delivery.
For the commercial company enhanced operational processes are a necessary but not sufficient condition for competitive success. In his 1996 Harvard Business Review article, ‘What is Strategy?’ Michael Porter draws a clear distinction between the need for operational effectiveness and strategic positioning. He notes that:
‘The quest for productivity, quality, and speed has spawned a remarkable number of management tools and techniques: total quality management, benchmarking, time-based competition, outsourcing, partnering, re- engineering, and change management. Although the operational improvements have often been dramatic, many companies have been frustrated by their inability to translate those gains into sustainable profitability… A company can outperform rivals only if it can establish a difference that can be preserved’.
In the Balanced Scorecard of a commercial business, the Internal Business Processes objectives and measures should not focus solely on enhancing processes per se but should also focus on those capabilities that deliver competitive advantage. The objectives and measures should cover such areas as bringing new products to the market, production operations, logistics and delivery channels. Corporations in the computer industry for example, seek competitive advantage through the rapid development of new products that effectively make current products obsolete. Other manufacturing organisations may seek to differentiate their products on the basis of longevity and reliability and may need to focus on low-defect production quality measures and objectives. By contrast, Stalk, Evans and Shulman (1992) emphasise the way in which supply chain logistics capabilities can become the heart of competitive strategy in the retail industry. Within the financial services industry, objectives and measures relating to delivery channel usage are playing an increasing role in identifying competitive strategies.
2.5 The Learning and Growth Quadrant The Learning and Growth quadrant focuses on enabling the organisation. The objectives within this perspective deal with the cultivation of an infrastructure for future development and organisational learning. These objectives deal with the strategic investment in people, processes, information systems and organisational culture. The identification of the key strategic measures to be used in this quadrant represents a challenge for management. Although most businesses would agree with the logic of investing in skills training and efficient information systems, it is not always clear how to identify the strategic significance of ‘soft’ issues such as team motivation, creativity cultures and knowledge management. Table 3 provides some examples of objectives and measures within the Learning and Growth quadrant.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard The Balanced Scorecard Explained 17
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard The Balanced Scorecard Explained18
Kaplan and Norton suggest that Learning and Growth measures should deal with issues of employee skills, motivation, and organisation alignment and information systems capabilities. In their research of US corporations, however, they discovered that the Learning and Growth quadrant was the most under-utilised. In 1996 they concluded that,
‘When it comes to specific measures concerning employee skills, strategic information availability, and organizational alignment, companies have devoted virtually no effort for measuring either the outcomes or the drivers of these capabilities’ (1996a: 144).
With issues such as human capital (Stewart, 1997), employee empowerment (Simons, 1995), and the ‘strategizing’ contribution of the individual (Hamel, 1996) increasingly on the management agenda, the Learning and Growth quadrant has an important role to play in the control of modern business. In their best selling book, Competing for the Future, business professors Gary Hamel and C.K. Prahalad (1996) put another slant on this notion of an enabling infrastructure. They suggest that the key to competitive success over time is to cultivate hard to replicate core competencies that can be leveraged to make a disproportionate contribution to customer-perceived value. Core competencies are defined in terms of bundles of skills and technologies that are resident across an entire organisation (Prahalad and Hamel, 1990). A core competence represents the sum of learning across individual skill sets and individual organisational units’ (Hamel and Prahalad, 1996:223).
The Learning and Growth perspective may therefore be applied to monitor the acquisition, cultivation and exploitation of core competencies (Aisthorpe et al, 1998). With an enabling infrastructure in place, the organisation will need to apply this potential into developing the key internal processes at which it must excel in order to meet its customer objectives or service delivery agreements.
2.6 Outcome Measures and Performance Drivers In the Balanced Scorecard there are generally two types of measures. The first are sometimes referred to as ‘outcome measures’ because they describe the results of past actions, such as the utilisation of resources or activities performed. This type of measure is normally found in the ‘higher’ quadrants of a traditional Scorecard – Financial and Customer. The second are referred to as ‘performance drivers’ because they represent hypotheses about actions that will determine or influence future outcomes. For example, if we improve staff training we will retain customers and earn higher margins. Well-designed Scorecards will attempt to combine outcome measures and performance drivers within and between quadrants.
2.7 Linking the Quadrants: Cause and Effect Relationships Kaplan and Norton’s (1996a) research highlights the cause and effect linkages between the measures in the various quadrants. When designing Scorecards, attention needs to be given to the understanding of cause and effect linkages. Figure 4, overleaf, shows some hypothetical linkages that may exist between performance measures in the various quadrants. For example, it may be hypothesised that an increase in production quality may flow through into a rise in customer satisfaction measures.
Some relationships between measures may be verified through experience and analysis. The perception of the validity of the linkages will often be strongly influenced by the time allowed for the desired effect to materialise. For example, solving a shortage of staff in an NHS hospital by implementing training may take several years; whilst reducing product development time could quite quickly influence customers’ perceptions of a commercial organisation. Although cause and effect terminology can make linkages seem deliberate and positive, this may not in fact be the case. It is unlikely that managers will be able to anticipate all the effects of their actions and there may well be some unexpected and negative side effects. Organisations will need to remain watchful and ready to respond.
Each quadrant of the Scorecard reflects a key focus and the measures in each quadrant should be selected such that there are no ‘perverse’ measures; i.e. measures do not conflict with each other. However, it should not be assumed that all of the measures must necessarily be related to each other. As Olve et al (1999) comment,
‘If we could relate all measures to each other, then we could put a monetary value on computer literacy or customer service for example’.
Kaplan and Norton (1996a) emphasise the Financial quadrant as the focus of all the objectives in the three other quadrants and, for many organisations, the Financial quadrant may also determine the pace at which strategic change can take place. For example, if an organisation needs to generate cash flow, this will set the priority for action. Similarly, if a public organisation is in danger of overspending its budget, it may have to compromise certain objectives and prioritise its actions.
Key Points:
● The Balanced Scorecard encourages managers to consider a portfolio of both financial and non financial measures.
● Balanced Scorecard measures are linked to the organisation’s strategic objectives.
● The generic Balanced Scorecard contains four quadrants: Financial; Customer; Internal Business Processes; Learning and Growth.
● Contemporary Scorecard designs increasingly reflect the importance of the customer’s (or citizen’s) perspective.
● Balanced Scorecard measures should reinforce each other.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard The Balanced Scorecard Explained 19
Figure 4: Hypothesising Linkages between Scorecard Measures
Learning & Growth Internal Business Processes
Financial Customer
Skills Training
Investment
Revenue
Productivity Quality
Customer Satisfaction
Customer Retention
Product Development Time
Costs
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard20
Whilst there may be many reasons for an organisation adopting a Balanced Scorecard, seeking to effect change which results in performance improvement is likely to be high on the list. As we have seen, the motive for Scorecard implementation is inexorably linked to organisational strategy. To make effective changes, an organisation needs to seek clarity in a number of interrelated areas if the resulting Scorecard is to provide a cohesive route to its chosen objectives.
3.1 Vision and Values The organisation needs to have a clear and concise view of its purpose or mission; the reason why it exists, and the core values that will guide its actions. It needs a clear vision of how it wishes to evolve and a strategy of how to get there. Kakabadse (2001) describes a process he calls ‘visioning’ by which the key actors in an organisation reach a consensus about the future of the organisation. Whether an organisation is in the private or public sector, it is unlikely that it will have the ability to formulate a vision without taking account of a wide range of stakeholders. Senge (1990) also makes an invaluable contribution to the understanding of the process of building a shared vision and the role of mental models in his seminal work, The Fifth Discipline- The Art & Practice of The Learning Organisation.
3.2 Stakeholder Analysis A stakeholder is defined, in the broadest sense, as anyone who has a legitimate interest in the performance of an organisation. Some will have more power than others and the prudent organisation will identify all of its stakeholders, rank them in a hierarchy and develop a process to understand their needs and aspirations. For the private sector organisation, the primary stakeholders are likely to be its shareholders and its key customer groups. Research conducted for this report shows that, for most organisations, strategy formulation remains an essentially internal process. This presents a challenge to organisations, particularly to the public sector where the Government is keen to establish much more stakeholder participation. The case study of Mersey Travel in Appendix 3 describes how one organisation has tried to reflect the views of a wide range of stakeholders in its planning and measurement processes.
3.3 Strategy Formulation Once the organisation has clarified its vision, the core values of the organisation will define the manner in which the organisation will move towards that vision of the future. A detailed plan of ‘how to get there’ is then laid out in the organisation’s strategy formulation. As part of this undertaking, the organisation may also need to clarify its ethical position, and unless its values reflect a culture of trust, empowerment and team working, it is unlikely that all the benefits of the Balanced Scorecard process will be achieved.
Whilst it is beyond the scope of this guide to detail the extensive literature relating to organisational strategy, there are a number of fundamental issues that need to be considered before starting to build a Scorecard. The first of these is the ongoing debate as to the relationship between the formulation of strategy and its implementation. This distinction between the ‘determination of goals’ and ‘the adoption of courses of action necessary for carrying out these goals’, was acknowledged as early as Chandler’s (1962) popularisation of the concept of business strategy.
3.4 The Theory of Strategic Choice This separation of strategy roles is often played out in accordance with the Theory of Strategic Choice, which states that organisations change in accordance with the vision, ideas and objectives of its strongest members (Stacey, 2000). The phenomena is often caricatured as the members of the senior management team locked in a darkened room until they develop the strategy that will subsequently be implemented by the rest of the organisation.
The management literature of the 1990s highlights this issue and advocates that strategy formulation should not be confined to the top of the organisational pyramid. Rather, strategy should enjoy a much wider constituency of participants in order to maximise the creative and informational input (see Simons, 1995; Hamel, 1996; Stacey, 2000; Stewart, 1997). The modern literature further claims that as today’s corporations have to operate in increasingly dynamic and turbulent environments, strategy needs to be both forward looking and change orientated (Hamel & Prahlahad 1996).
Industry case studies conducted for this report confirm the prevalence of the orthodox approach in UK organisations. In the cases examined, the organisations maintained a distinction between formulation and implementation, with the senior teams developing the strategy and then grappling with the issues of communicating and aligning the rest of the organisation to the strategy. There were some notable exceptions, with the case studies revealing that a few of the organisations had gone to considerable lengths to involve a broad cross section of staff in the strategy formulation process. For example,
‘We set up a series of working groups effectively in all of the management areas in the business. Their challenge was to look at performance measures that were already used and decide whether those were adequate or whether they required change. The guide that was given was to say, think about what you actually talk about in terms of performance when you have your management meetings’ (Major Power Company).
3. Balanced Scorecard Foundations
3.5 Strategic Architecture Having noted that the strategy upon which the Balanced Scorecard process is based needs to be dynamic and future orientated, it is worth briefly considering a modern strategy formulation approach that encapsulates these principles. Hamel and Prahalad (1989; 1993; 1996) postulate a strategic management framework in which organisations pursue future competitive success through the re-invention of their markets and the deployment of ‘core competencies’ (Prahalad and Hamel, 1990). They call the formulation process through which an organisation translates its current core competencies into future competitive success, ‘Strategic Architecture’ (Hamel and Prahalad, 1996:117). Strategic architecture represents the information road map of the organisation’s progress towards its anticipated competitive ambitions. Indeed, Hamel and Prahalad emphasise that,
‘Strategic architecture is a broad opportunity approach plan. The question addressed by a strategic architecture is not what we must do to maximise our revenues or share in an existing product market, but what we must do today, in terms of competence acquisition, to prepare ourselves to capture a significant share of the future revenues in an emerging opportunity arena’ (1996:121).
The road map to future success not only emphasises the organisation’s destination but also informs about the route necessary to achieve it.
Whilst the appeal of capturing forward competitive success is compelling, Hamel and Prahalad’s method for formulating strategy content presents certain difficulties. First, concepts which work well at a corporate level and generically between industries, may be difficult to translate into actual resource allocations in specific organisations (Hamel and Prahalad, 1996:223). Managers must be able to encapsulate and ‘take hold of’ information about core competencies and future competitive ambitions in a tangible way if they are to be managed. Second, a method is required to communicate strategic architecture throughout the organisation in order for it to form the basis of a shared dialogue about strategy and to generate strategic alignment.
One useful methodology which aids the ‘solidity’ of grasping strategic architecture construction and also creates a robust communication platform for strategy, is the use of ‘Strategy Objects’ (Littler et al, 2000). The methodology breaks down both strategy formulation and implementation monitoring into common building blocks. The ‘gaps’ between strategy formulation and implementation may be overcome by constructing the organisation’s strategy for future success and its performance measurement system from these common elements.
3.6 Steps to Strategic Success There are many different approaches to the formulation of strategy, but many strategists would agree key steps along the path to success include:
● Translating strategic vision into goals, objectives and measures;
● Identifying and adopting the courses of action, resource allocations and necessary routes to achieving these objectives;
● Communicating this vision to all relevant stakeholders and building consensus; and
● Monitoring and managing the implementation of these activities.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard 21
Key Points:
● The organisation needs to have a concise understanding of its purpose and core values.
● Prudent organisations conduct stakeholder analysis and understand stakeholders’ needs and aspirations.
● Strategy formulation should not be confined to the top of the organisational pyramid.
● The Balanced Scorecard can provide a common language and architecture for formulating strategy.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard22
Having been through the difficult process of formulating a strategy, the organisation needs to ensure that it has a systematic method for translating its newly developed strategy into operational objectives and measures. This is a critical transition and one that many organisations fail to make. In their book ‘The Strategy Focused Organization’, Kaplan and Norton (2001) provide evidence that the ability to execute strategy is more important than the quality of the strategy itself. They cite the frightening statistic,
‘that only ten percent of effectively formulated strategies are successfully implemented.’
4.1 Executive Commitment If this common experience is to be remedied, there are a number of key issues that will have to be addressed; but perhaps the most fundamental to successful strategy implementation is the total and visible ‘buy in’ of all members of the senior management team. The IIBFS research demonstrated that a number of change projects have run into difficulties because of a lack of commitment from senior management. An executive from a major power company made the following comments:
‘We had one sort of false start in introducing it [the Balanced Scorecard]. The executive at that time was still very much preoccupied with managing the ‘old world’, which was a predominant thing, so they weren’t really very enthusiastic about it’.
A similar problem was seen in water utility:
‘It was a very drawn out process really and one of the key killers was that there was no support at the top table … it was just another initiative like EFQM … we didn’t have significant buy-in. I think the buy-in was one of the critical items in the process’.
Some organisations gave a distinct impression that the Balanced Scorecard was only for middle management and below. The main board would concern themselves with the measures important to the ‘City’. Quite how these organisations were seeking to achieve their strategic objectives was not apparent but there must have been significant difficulties in convincing employees to ‘buy in’ to a process that their leaders overtly disregarded.
4.2 Getting Started The organisation needs to have the commitment of the senior executives and key opinion formers before it can start to develop its Balanced Scorecard. Once this is achieved there are a number of important stages to implementation. These suggested stages, along with some potential anticipated time requirements, are illustrated in the chart below.
The chart below can only be indicative of the time requirements. The actual requirement will be dictated by the main constraint, which is typically seen to be the availability of senior executives. This in turn will be dictated in some measure by the weight of emphasis the organisation’s leaders give to the Scorecard process.
4. Balanced Scorecard Implementation
Figure 5: Key Phases in Scorecard Development
Action Duration Month 1 Month 2 Month 3 Month 4 Month 5 Days
1 Appoint champion 1
2 Select implementation team 1
3 Decide organisation units 1
4 Overall scorecard design 7
5 Interview & brief key players 21
6 Refine strategy objectives 3
7 Synthesise results of action 1
8 Senior management workshop 1
9 Agree SMART measures 5
10 Sub group meetings 20
11 Strategy mapping 7
12 Draft scorecards 5
13 Second workshop 1
14 Agree all measures 7
15 Devise appropriate reward system 3
16 Design implementation plan 5
17 Start implementation or pilot 1
4.3 A Scorecard Champion Research indicates the importance of appointing a ‘champion’ or sponsor for the Scorecard process to act in the role of architect, and to lead the organisation through the implementation phase. Whilst it is not necessary for the architect to be a member of the top team, research has shown that this is a pivotal role requiring a strong and influential leader who can influence all levels in the organisation.
4.4 Choosing the Implementation Team Once the champion has been selected, they will typically draw together a team to assist with the design and implementation stages of the Scorecard process. In many cases, a Scorecard system will involve people from different departments or functions within an organisation. It is important that all the diverse interests involved feel some sense of ownership for the project. A major pharmaceutical company took this approach:
‘We set it up as a multi-functional team with a sponsor who actually is the Supply Chain and Manufacturing Director…right from the word go we wanted to make sure that the manufacturing and commercial people both had a stake in what we were doing …‘.
As well as a careful blending of functional skills, such as IT and human resources, it is worthwhile considering the personalities of the team members. Personality profiling (such as the Belbin process) will assist the architect in constructing a well balanced team.
4.5 The Overall Scorecard Structure The next phase of the Scorecard process is for the overall structure of the Scorecard template to emerge from the team’s deliberations. Research indicates that development teams do not need to be constrained by the template of the Scorecard as originally postulated. Whilst the Kaplan and Norton Scorecard process evolved around their four quadrants, many of the UK organisations used a different number of perspectives. This is highlighted in the survey results shown in Figure 6, opposite.
4.6 Quadrants The most common deviation from the generic model is the number of Scorecard perspectives (for example, quadrants) and their focus. Many public sector organisations remain, for example, uncomfortable with the enduring prominence given to financial performance measures and commentators have suggested alternative designs that such organisations might be more comfortable with (Olve et al, 2000).
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard 23
Figure 6: Conformance with the Generic Scorecard Design
How closely does the design of your performance management system conform to the Balanced Scorecard as defined by Kaplan and Norton?
% o
f o
rg an
is at
io n
s su
rv ey
ed
12
10
8
6
4
2
0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Different Same
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Balanced Scorecard Implementation24
In this alternative model:
● The financial sector is replaced by a performance focus recording the achievements of the public sector organisation;
● The customer focus is replaced by a relationship focus recording the organisation’s interfaces with the citizens it serves;
● The activity focus records the internal activities of the organisation; and
● The future focus is similar to the learning and growth perspective and directs the public sector organisation’s thoughts to the future. This will encompass demographic issues such as the future requirement for schools and roads. It will also consider the skills required for the future. For example, local government may have to consider the training and skill implications of ‘E’ government.
The choice of perspective could be directed and clarified by the organisational strategy, but the architect will need to ensure that the quadrants or equivalent are agreed before moving on in the process. Customisation, in general, allows a company to adapt the basic framework whilst adhering to conceptual ideas. In fact Kaplan and Norton (1996a) state:
‘The Balanced Scorecard must reflect the structure of the organisation for which the strategy has been formulated’.
In attempting to reflect the structure of the organisation, the architect and the design team must evaluate if it is desirable and feasible to cascade the Scorecard structure down through the organisation, or across business functions. They also need to decide to what extent it is possible to tailor the Scorecard to the different levels of an organisation and for different divisions or departments without losing sight of the overall strategic priorities and objectives.
4.7 Cascading the Scorecard There are clear theoretical advantages to cascading the Scorecard down through an organisation. It can encourage commitment to, and alignment with, the organisation’s strategic objectives. It is important that the Scorecard templates in use are relevant to the actual activities of the people at the level to which it is addressed. If the Scorecard template is seen as too abstract or far removed from the actual work situation, it is likely to fall into disuse. On the other hand, it is important that the Scorecard templates are not set up in a purely expedient way, simply to provide some structure to the day to day activities of particular groups of employees. Throughout an organisation, scorecard templates should be designed with the overarching aim of being truly aligned with the strategic objectives.
Figure 7: Alternative Scorecard Perspectives
Relationship Focus
Performance Focus
Future Focus
Activity Focus
Many organisations consider that it is advantageous for their employees to have an understanding of the strategy and their role within it. In some cases it is acknowledged that resources will be expended in creating this understanding, but this can be regarded as an investment for the future. For example, a major brewer expressed the following comment:
‘We are investing a lot of time, in a practical sense, so they [employees] can be aware of everything that makes the numbers work’.
4.8 Scorecard Templates for Different Organisational Levels Different approaches may be taken towards devising Scorecard templates for different organisational levels. To some extent, it appears there may be a trade off between obtaining the greatest possible strategic alignment for the whole organisation, and ensuring that each level is addressed by a Scorecard template which is closely tailored to the operational needs of that level.
The use of the Scorecard by the leisure retailing division of a major brewer provides a good case study of an organisation that has developed a number of Scorecard templates that are closely tailored to the specific operating circumstances of different levels. Within this division there is a hierarchy of Scorecards designed to match the organisational structure. Separate Scorecards operate at:
● Divisional level; ● Retail business manager level (covering between 8 and 22
retail outlets); and ● The individual retail outlets.
A key feature of the Scorecard system is that both the form and content of the Scorecard varies between each level reflecting the different management tasks predominant at each level.
The division level Scorecard is strategic in focus and closely aligned with the company’s strategic aims, which were, in the example of the leisure and retail division, to reposition and expand the estate function and to improve employee productivity and motivation in order to maximise profits at the retail level. At the ‘retail business manager level’ the management task is partially shifted from strategy towards operational control and performance. The associated Scorecard therefore differs substantially from the divisional Scorecard.
There are linkages between the two Scorecards but the alignment of the four Scorecard perspectives is quite unlike that of the divisional Scorecard. The Scorecard, at this level, is used as a performance contract. The remuneration of the retail business manager is assessed on the basis of the success achieved in meeting targets across the four key dimensions of the Scorecard. At the ‘outlet level’ the focus of the Scorecard is on the promotion of teamwork and service delivery. The outlet Scorecard is physically implemented as a visible whiteboard display divided into four quadrants. The measures on the scoreboard are simple and directly related to the daily concerns of the staff in the particular outlet. The four quadrants for this tier of the Scorecard are:
● Daily sales Vs. Target ● Mystery customer score ● Staff hours and roster ● Staff notice board
In this example, a decision has clearly been made not to capture performance management information at the outlet level. This is partly on the grounds of cost and partly because the company has taken the view that it is not meaningful to analyse outlet performance across geographical areas or brand chain. The company does, however, believe that it is vital that there is an appropriate balance between the quadrants within each individual outlet ensuring that the service/profit value chains functions correctly.
4.9 Scorecard Templates for Different Divisions Many organisations are faced with the task of implementing Scorecard templates across a number of operating divisions. Again there is a balance to be struck between Scorecard templates that are highly tailored to the operational characteristics of particular divisions and the need to create an overall sense of strategic alignment. Most organisations are also faced with the task of ensuring that particular divisions are convinced of the value of the Scorecard and are willing to support it enthusiastically. The comments regarding the position at a UK broadcasting company touch on many of the important issues:
‘Once we have a high level divisional Scorecard, we would be encouraging our departments to develop their own Scorecards ‘piggy-backing’ on the key elements of the directorate level Scorecard, but obviously shaped slightly differently and much more specific to their own target audience. This has two advantages, not only does it get the department much more comfortable with using the Scorecard as a tool, it also makes it much more relevant to the departments concerned; it links the directorate strategy firmly into the departmental strategies and vice versa. It means that staff in those individual departments can see...how they contribute to the overall strategy ... and therefore it’s a motivating factor in itself as well as a way of communicating the strategy.‘
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Balanced Scorecard Implementation 25
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Balanced Scorecard Implementation26
4.10 Integration of Scorecards In cases where a number of Scorecards are in use across an organisation, the issue of how the Scorecards are integrated becomes quite important. In one major insurance company, for example, there were a plethora of Scorecards in place within the Operations division, employing approximately two-thirds of the insurance group’s personnel. Every month each of the five senior managers within the Operations division, present a Scorecard to each other and to the Operations director. Each of the Scorecards conforms to a template. Interestingly, they do not attempt to aggregate the Scorecards to form a top-level Scorecard. The organisation expresses the maxim that:
‘When you get very high level information that’s an extreme aggregation of disparate entities ... you cannot manage for improvement’.
A further example is shown in a national catering company, where the 12 subsidiary businesses have their own Scorecard. These Scorecards are not identical so the various autonomous boards have the scope to include or exclude measures, as they deem fit. However, these subsidiary Scorecards all feed into a top level Scorecard. Review meetings are necessary to enable information from all the different companies to be collated. This collation of disparate information seems to be quite a major issue, particularly as the company has taken over many companies, all with different reporting and performance measurement systems. The company has sought to establish best practice and benchmarking techniques.
One way of managing the integration issue is to adopt an approach where the Scorecard system is driven from the top downward rather than built up in parallel in different divisions? This is broadly the model adopted by a major UK financial services institution, which comments that:
‘Banking Services has two Scorecards, one of which is a global Scorecard used for upward reporting purposes … then we say, this is what we have collectively got to deliver, this is what it means for you as a region, or you as a product area and we would cascade it down in this manner … what you’ll see in all our next line reports is that everybody has a share of their performance linked to the overall performance and linked to their own units’ performance both counted in Balanced Business Scorecard terms. Where we can we translate the (global) Scorecard measure into their area and then add in other things as well, so we try to get absolute clarity.’
4.11 Briefing the Key Players The Scorecard design phase provides a valuable opportunity to bring the organisation together and build a strong consensus around the vision and strategic direction. Indeed, many Scorecard users see this as one of the key benefits of the Scorecard process and at least as valuable as the measurements themselves. Olve et al describe this benefit very succinctly:
‘The Scorecard often becomes a catalyst for discussions which actually could have been held without it, but which become essential when it is used’.
Kaplan and Norton suggest starting the process of essential discussion by preparing briefing documents for each member of the senior management team and other key opinion formers. This briefing, it is recommended, should include full details of the organisation’s environment such as market conditions, legislation, policies, and financial data. In short, all the information that informed the strategy formulation process. It might also be useful to include a brief overview of the vision and strategy; an explanation of the key features of the Balanced Scorecard and a draft implementation timetable.
4.12 Structured Interviews for Identification of Measures When the key players have had the opportunity to review the briefing, the design team should follow up with structured interviews with each key individual. By posing the same carefully selected questions to each individual, the team can begin to understand the key issues and what measures might be necessary. If they listen carefully at this stage, they may detect undercurrents that can be resolved rather than surfacing with a negative impact at a later stage in the Scorecard process. Preparing for the interview should help the individual managers focus on, and clarify their thoughts on, how to translate the strategy into operational measures. In a well-constructed process, the architect and his team might also interview influential stakeholders such as shareholders (or citizen groups) and ascertain their requirements.
4.13 Synthesising the Interview Results When each of the key players and stakeholders has been interviewed, the design team may consolidate the findings and prepare a first draft of the Scorecard highlighting the key issues and measures relevant to each quadrant and perspective. This is preparatory work for a senior management workshop into the key measures and the next round of actions. The design team should review the measures suggested to ensure that they do not conflict with each other and that they generally drive the organisation towards its strategic goals. If there are any obvious conflicts they should be put on the agenda for the senior management workshop.
4.14 Utilising Senior Management Workshops A key milestone in the Scorecard process is the successful use of a senior management workshop. The stage at which the workshop is utilised is found to vary between organisations, but it is seen as a significant advantage to the process of communication and obtaining cohesion within the Scorecard process. At the beginning of such a workshop it is anticipated that the organisation will know that typically around 20-25 measures are required for the average Scorecard and senior management will have been fully briefed on the findings from the preliminary interviews. By the end of the workshop, one measure of success would be that management has agreed upon the four to five critical measures for each of the selected quadrants of the high level Scorecard. The next step is to devise an action plan for developing complementary Scorecards for other parts of the organisation, where appropriate. It is argued that the first draft Scorecard should pass the ‘acid test’ of an impartial observer being able to deduce the organisation’s strategy from the measures on the Scorecard.
4.15 Performance Measures After the first senior management workshop the architect and the design team need to co-ordinate a series of meetings with the sub–groups to refine the strategic objectives and ensure they reflect the decisions made at the workshop. They need to ensure that all the proposed objectives are closely linked to the strategy. A measure, or measures, are then designed for each objective so that the full intent of each objective is captured. This exercise can be very demanding, particularly in UK public sector organisations that have Government imposed Public Service Agreements that may have hundreds of target measures. Whilst their strategy may be framed by many measures, it may prove confusing and unhelpful to try and highlight all of these measures on a Scorecard. The issue may be resolved by the production of several inter-linked Scorecards concentrating on specific segments of the framework. Some groups may take the approach of attempting to develop composite measures that allow the clustering of related measures but still ensure that the primary strategic objective is achieved. Whichever design is used, there are specific criteria that all good performance measures should meet. An example of performance measure criteria is provided in the government guideline Choosing the Right Fabric. Desirable characteristics include:
● Relevance – to what the organisation is trying to achieve; ● The avoidance of perverse incentives – to ensure unwanted
or wasteful behaviour is not encouraged; ● Attributable – the activity measured must be capable of
being influenced by the organisation and it should be clear where accountability lies;
● Well-defined – with a clear, unambiguous definition so that data will be collected consistently, and the measure is easy to understand and use;
● Timely production of data – to track progress; ● Reliability – accurate enough for its intended use and
responsive to change; ● Comparable – with either past periods or similar
programmes elsewhere; and ● Verifiable – with clear documentation, so that the
processes which produce the measure can be validated.
Research for this report demonstrated the nature of performance measures used within UK organisations. A sample of 60 organisations utilising a Balanced Scorecard or similar performance measurement system, showed the frequency of utilisation of the following measures.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Balanced Scorecard Implementation 27
Table 4: Commonly Utilised Performance Measures in UK Scorecards
Performance measure No of % of companies companies
Profitability 59 98.3
Revenue growth 54 90.0
Return on investment/capital 48 80.0
Market share 45 75.0
Customer satisfaction 45 75.0
Cost reduction 44 73.3
Share price 43 71.7
Customer service level 43 71.7
Productivity 36 60.0
Employee satisfaction 34 56.7
Employee retention 30 50.0
Employee training/ competency levels 30 50.0
Supplier service levels 28 46.7
Process statistics 28 46.7
Process quality 27 45.0
Customer retention 22 36.7
Economic value added 21 35.0
Customer profitability 20 33.3
Brand value 19 31.7
Customer acquisition 15 25.0
Employee profitability 8 13.3
Human capital 4 6.7
Intellectual capital 3 5.0
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Balanced Scorecard Implementation28
Table 5, below, identifies the ‘top ten’ most utilised measures and locates them by their typical position in the classic Scorecard structure. The continued importance of financial measures is evident from the findings.
4.16 Availability of Information Organisations can potentially become frustrated with the Scorecard process if they devise measures that are significantly beyond their current data collection capabilities. Unless the organisation is prepared to completely change its reporting and move significant resources into the project, the design team need to ensure the information required for a measure is relatively simple to access, or does not require fundamental and time consuming changes to existing management information systems. It is particularly important that information can be obtained in a timely manner so that the data is still relevant to events in the organisation.
4.17 Strategy Mapping It is worth remembering that the process of linking measures to the strategy is one of the key aspects that differentiates the Balanced Scorecard from a static list of key performance indicators. Research has highlighted that UK organisations have understood and implemented this concept and this is illustrated in Figure 8, below.
Financial (5 of 10)
● Profitability ● Revenue growth ● Return on investment/capital ● Cost reduction ● Share price
Internal (1 of 10)
● Productivity measure
Customer (3 of 10)
● Market share ● Customer satisfaction ● Customer service level
Learning & Growth (1 of 10)
● Employee satisfaction
Table 5: Ten Most Popular Performance Measures
Figure 8: Linkage Between Strategy and Measures
Measures used in strategy Strategy defined measures
% o
f o
rg an
is at
io n
s su
rv ey
ed
20
15
10
5
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Not linked Linked
In complex organisations with many subsidiary Scorecards, it is essential that the architect and the team keep a clear overview of the relationships between the various Scorecards, the measures in each quadrant and the relationship of the measures to each other. In a relatively simple organisation it might be possible for the architect to retain this grand design in the form of a mental map but, clearly, this could be very demanding within complex organisations. If a coherent approach is to be maintained, some form of strategy mapping can prove very useful.
The strategic architecture described in Chapter 3 can provide a powerful tool for such an overview. In the Strategy Focused Organisation, Kaplan and Norton advocate the use of strategy mapping as a powerful tool for explicating the cause and effect relationships. It can also be a useful mechanism for ensuring that measures are aligned with the organisation’s value stream and do not conflict with each other. By using the concepts of strategic architecture and strategy mapping, the team can produce the outputs equivalent to those which Kaplan and Norton suggest for this next phase of the process:
● A list of the objectives for the perspective, accompanied by a detailed description of each objective;
● A description of the measures for each objective; ● An illustration of how each measure can be quantified and
displayed; and ● A graphic model of how the measures are linked within the
perspective and to measures (or objectives) in other perspectives.
4.18 The Second Workshop Once the design team is confident that they have a robust overview of the strategy, the hierarchy of Scorecards and the draft objectives and measures, they can arrange a second workshop. Bearing in mind that this is a consensus building meeting as well as a design meeting, a more diverse range of participants is useful. Experience has shown that this is a good stage to introduce middle and junior managers to the process. As for the first workshop, it is beneficial if all the participants are briefed on progress well before the meeting. The briefing pack should include all the details of the output of the first meeting. At the workshop, the champion and his team need to adopt a low profile and build consensus and commitment by letting the representatives of the sub-groups lead the Second workshop sessions. The groups studied in the research programme found it useful to break into working groups to weight the objectives and measures in terms of priority and timetables.
For example, the comment below shows the importance of obtaining commitment through ownership while developing the key measures.
Q: ‘How did you come up with the ‘key’ measures?’ A: ‘We gave them the opportunity, it was iterative really, we
said, ‘What does it mean to you?’... because they’ve got to own it.’ (Water Utility)
The champion’s role moves to that of conductor and facilitator for this phase. There is likely to be a high level of debate as various groups try to promote their particular interests. The process might become very political with some groups fearing their status in the organisation will be diminished unless their function or division is prominent on the Scorecard. The Scorecard champion needs to manage this and make sure the measures on the card reflect the strategic priorities, the critical success factors, the measures that will really make a difference, and that they link logically with the organisation’s value chain.
4.19 Time Phasing Considerable thought will have to be given to the time phasing and priority given to measures. Not all measures will have an equal effect and the organisation may require some immediate and significant effects to build confidence that it is capable of achieving longer-term objectives. Although some strategies have been developed around single themes, many organisations, including those in the public sector, have several strands or streams to their strategy. For example, the strategic themes for a large organisation might be resolved into short, medium and long-term components.
Short-term themes could be to cut costs and maximise profits. Medium term themes could be to become more customer focused. Longer team themes might include innovations such as a balanced portfolio of developing companies or products that will provide higher margins and future growth. By carefully planning the time phasing of these themes organisations can create sustainable profit streams, sustained growth in shareholder value and move purposefully to public service agreement targets.
During this meeting, the workload of implementing and cascading the Scorecard should move from the champion and the design team to the operational leaders and their units. The champion continues in the role of conductor and facilitator. At this stage in the process a number of the companies studied reported concerns that the new measures necessitated an entirely new management information system and a significant number opted for a pilot system to iron out difficulties.
4.20 Pilot Schemes In some organisations the emphasis was very much on testing whether the whole Scorecard concept would prove to be worthwhile. After the second workshop, and if appropriate to the pilot study, the senior team should meet for a third time to establish final consensus on the measures and decisions reached. They need to consider how they can align reward and remuneration packages with the measurement system and plan how they are going to communicate the proposed innovations and changes to all members of the organisation.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Balanced Scorecard Implementation 29
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Balanced Scorecard Implementation30
4.21 The Balanced Paycheque The IIBFS research illustrated a paradoxical relationship between strategic objectives and employee considerations that could undermine a strategy. Although employee satisfaction was one of the ‘top ten’ popular performance measures, the stakeholder rankings indicated that senior managers were treated considerably better than other employees. Indeed, the stakeholder rankings suggested that employee interests were ranked in the lowest levels of the survey. Whilst the research shows that the organisations studied did link target measures to remuneration, it was not apparent what weighting was given to the relative measures.
The relative weighting given to measures is a key feature in aligning remuneration packages with strategic objectives and in underpinning the desired behaviour and culture. Just as the strategy can be deduced from the Scorecard, so the remuneration calculation reveals what the organisation truly values. If we take the example of the Chief Executive who addresses his employees and tells them that he values employee safety and customer service above all else. Will the employees accept this and adopt the necessary behaviour if, for example, their annual bonus is calculated 95% on the profit figure and 2.5% for safety and 2.5% for customer satisfaction measures? If the remuneration scheme is honest and properly aligned with the proposed Balanced Scorecard measures it will focus employee attention on the critical success factors. However, all strategies are hypotheses and the prudent organisation will allow a period of some months to ensure they have a robust strategy and reliable measures, demonstrably within the control of the relevant employees before negotiating associated employee remuneration packages. If these negotiations are to proceed smoothly it will be beneficial if everyone understands the strategy and the role they have to play if it is to be achieved. This will require a comprehensive communication programme and some key aspects are described in Chapter 5.
Key Points:
● Only a small percentage of effectively formulated strategies are successfully implemented.
● ‘Buy in’ from all members of the executive team is essential if a Scorecard process is to succeed.
● The process ‘champion’ is a pivotal role and should be given to a strong and influential leader.
● The Scorecard must reflect the structure of the organisation for which the strategy has been formulated.
● The Scorecard often becomes a catalyst for discussions which could have been held without it but which become essential when it is used.
● Not all measures will have an equal effect.
● The relative weighting given to measures in any remuneration package reveals what the organisation truly values.
Table 6: Use of Target Measures
Question Yes %
D11 Do you operate a planning process which includes the setting of targets for key performance indictors 55 91.7
% of those responding YES to D11
D12 If yes, are such targets used as part of objective setting for managers 53 96.4
D13 If yes, is this target setting for managers linked to remuneration 48 87.3
The illustrative organisations researched for this report took what might be considered a somewhat orthodox approach to strategy formulation, with those at the top of the management hierarchy planning the organisation’s strategy and the resources required to achieve it. Typically, this ‘top team’ also debated and agreed the objectives and measures that would deliver the strategy. This chapter reviews the actions that such an organisation needs to take to launch the Balanced Scorecard process, to act on the measurements it provides, and to constantly review their reliability and continuing validity.
5.1 Aligning the Stakeholders with the Strategy The Balanced Scorecard provides a common language and a useful instrument for communication within the organisation and with external stakeholders. If the explanation is well thought through and presented it can build consensus and ensure that all the stakeholders are aligned with the strategy. The following quotes from organisations taking part in the study confirm this use of the Scorecard:
‘The Scorecard won’t create strategy but it helps build consensus and helps deploy it.’ (Utility Company)
‘The reason we would use the BSC is because it aids getting everybody involved in your business objectives and understanding them.’ (Major Insurance Company)
5.2 Internal Communication In their book ‘The Strategy Focused Organisation,’ Kaplan and Norton (2001) make it clear that one of the key steps in successfully translating strategy into action is aligning the organisation to the strategy. This means ensuring that everyone at every level in the organisation understands the strategy and their role in achieving it. Disturbingly, the research for this report revealed that many organisations did not distribute management information to all employees. Respondents to the questionnaire revealed that few companies provided all information in the performance management system to all employees. On average, less than 50% of information was available to all employees, whereas more than 50% was available to all managers. Surprisingly, 8% of respondents stated that none of the information in the performance management system was available to all managers. If information on their performance is withheld, it is going to be difficult to get employees to change their behaviour or to provide valuable feedback. Furthermore, the case studies provided little evidence of organisations seeking the opinions and input of employees to the strategy formulation process. Communication appears to have been restricted to ensuring that employees fully understood their objectives and associated measures. Similarly, although a number of organisations had made reference to a wider range of stakeholders, none had a formal process for capturing stakeholder input. Whilst most had mechanisms for providing performance information to external stakeholders, the degree of transparency was very variable.
5.3 External Communication As well as being reluctant to give information to all employees, many organisations are even more reluctant to give detailed information to external shareholders other than in carefully edited board reports. Government policies mean that public sector organisations, by contrast, have to have a higher degree of transparency and considerable emphasis is being given to publishing details of performance relative to clear performance targets.
Demand for more disclosure is growing in both the public and private sectors. Recent research indicates that as well as detailed financial information, analysts want more non- financial data that would help them to understand what an organisation was trying to achieve, the key risks and the depth of its competitive strategy. The analysts believe that well run organisations should promote this type of disclosure as it helps the analysts to give more informed advice on prospects for future earnings and share value.
Although the majority of the organisations studied recognised that the Balanced Scorecard could improve communication, there appeared to be quite a variation in the effort and resources invested in the communication process. Some of the organisations were content with little more than informal conversations between a few select employees, whilst others gave the issue considerable thought, invested significant resources and developed quite innovative approaches to communication.
5.4 A Benchmark Communication Process Morrison Construction implemented a customised Balanced Scorecard that used a highly imaginative golf analogy. This assisted the communication of key messages regarding the performance management system.
The company discovered the Balanced Scorecard at a point where the management team was considering whether existing measures were sufficient. It made the team take a holistic approach and they developed 18 measures that were important to the business. After setting benchmarks for each measure, they called the initiative ‘The Balanced Business Scorecard’, and generated the golf analogy for ease of communication with the rest of the company.
The 18 measures were called ‘holes’, and each hole was the equivalent of a Par 4. They decided that the average golfer would be delighted if he achieved a round of 90 shots (i.e. 5 shots per hole), but as they considered themselves a ‘very good golfer’ they believed they could achieve a round of Par (i.e. 4 shots per hole = 72), or even aim for some ‘birdies’ or ‘eagles’ (i.e. shots of 3 or 2), bringing the score down even lower.
5. Communication, Action, Reporting & Feedback
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard 31
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Communication, Action, Reporting & Feedback32
This tied in with their mission statement, ‘We aim to be the best in the business through the strongest commitment to quality and customer satisfaction’.
When the Balanced Business Scorecard was first introduced, the company scored 75, but this has been decreasing with the aim of entering the top quartile of the industry within each measure.
‘We feel that this is such a good way of conveying how we are doing and the contribution that people are making. This is well known within quality circles now…. there is a distinct advantage and we think it’s a winner. Anything other than 18 measures would damage it.’ (Morrison Consruction)
5.5 Translating the Strategy into Action Formulating the strategy, the objectives, the critical success factors and appropriate measures are all key steps in the strategy process. However, if the strategy is to succeed, there is a need to ensure it becomes a ‘living document’. The leaders of the organisation need to make the strategy come alive for all stakeholders. They need to demonstrate this by their actions, by providing all the necessary resources, and by a continuous communication process.
If an organisation is committed to the process, the Scorecard will become the focus of its management meetings, reporting and strategy development. Decision making is a very complex human activity but the Scorecard process can provide a framework for improving the rationality and consistency of the process. Some recent high profile business failures occured in organisations that claimed to use a Balanced Scorecard process. Initial evidence suggests that, amongst other things, they chose to ignore what their performance measurement systems were telling them. Consequently organisations need to discipline themselves to understand what the system is telling them and to use the information, even if unpalatable.
Further, if employees are to fully participate in open decision making they must feel secure enough to admit mistakes and to not meeting targets. The organisation must create a truly enabling culture that encourages openness and collaborative methods. If this is to be achieved there needs to be a full understanding of the concepts that underpin the Scorecard, such as negative feedback, double loop learning and the requirements for well presented, reliable data.
5.6 Negative Feedback Many of our current management concepts have roots in engineering and when we use measurements evaluated against a pre-determined measure or objective we are sometimes applying engineers’ ideas of control to human activity. The simplest form of this type of control is known as ‘negative feedback’ and it simply means making the comparison of the outcome of our actions to any stipulated desired outcome – any discrepancy between the two is fed back into the system to instigate corrective action.
A typical monthly management review meeting provides a good practical example of negative feedback in action. Most readers are probably familiar with this scenario in which actual measured performance is reviewed against business plan targets. If the performance does not meet the monthly target, a series of corrective actions to bring performance back on target are agreed and implemented. Negative feedback loops are very efficient in machines carrying out well-established tasks and devoid of emotion. However, human activity systems are not always like this and managers need to be careful to understand that having a measurement system does not always, and consistently, lead to good decision making. Management also needs to be scrupulous in ensuring that measurements are as accurate as possible and aware that the people making decisions may have different objectives and priorities.
5.7 Presentation In the previous chapter, we reviewed how the Scorecard measures needed to be appropriate to the level of the organisation that has to use them. This is very important, but it is of equal importance that the information is presented in a way that is meaningful to those who will be using it. The golfing Scorecard described earlier is one excellent example of how this can be achieved. Measurements do not always make for interesting reading and not all organisations have been as innovative. Numbers on their own can be intimidating and Scorecard designers need to ensure they make full use of visual aids such as graphs and charts. Measures can also be misleading, so it is important that any limitations of the data and contextual influences are explicit.
A number of the organisations studied in the research for this report used visual devices to enhance their presentation. For many organisations the concept of traffic lights is used to differentiate between measures that are meeting their target and those that are not. A green light indicates the target is being met; amber means a small negative variation or trend; red means a significant deviation. Whilst the traffic light provides a really useful high level indicator, it can have pejorative connotations and organisations need to be careful how they react to the ‘signals’. If it really has an open and enabling culture, the reaction to a red light needs to be supportive and not the start of a ‘witch hunt’. Unless the organisation takes this mature approach there will be attempts to hide missed targets, manipulate data and sweep mistakes under the carpet. A major pharmaceutical company used a system of dials to represent targets and measures as follows:
‘We used the analogy of driving a car. When you drive a car you have big dials, such as the speedometer, that you frequently look at and they provide you with key information. You always want to know what’s going on in terms of your speed. Then you get small dials such as the battery condition, the rev counter, things that you might want to refer to periodically…and then you’ve got warning lights, the classic one being something such as oil pressure, that says whilst its green or whilst its off you are not going to worry about it, but if it goes red you want to know immediately, because you are probably going to have to react fairly quickly.’ (Pharmaceutical Company)
5.8 Checking the Measurements If the organisation is going to make the Balanced Scorecard central to its decision making it needs to ensure that measurements are reliable, verifiable and have continuing validity. There are several statistical tools that can assist with ensuring that measurements are reliable but organisations need to be careful to ensure that an appropriate sample is used. A measure based on a very small sample of cases could give large fluctuations.
For the public sector the National Audit Office provides a wealth of performance information. It also provides a checklist for ensuring the provision of good quality information in its report: Good Practices in Performance Reporting in Executive Agencies and Non-Departmental Public Bodies.
If the measure is to be verifiable there needs to be a clear audit trail of documentation that renders the measurement process and its underlying assumptions transparent to all stakeholders.
5.9 Strategic Feedback and Double Loop Learning Modern strategic management theory emphasises the need for a dynamic view of strategy formation (Hamel and Prahalad, 1996). When competitive environments are undergoing significant change, strategists need to focus ahead and try to envisage how markets will look in the future. They must then identify what abilities the organisation must develop in order to succeed in those markets. So, as well as reviewing actual performance against targets, the monthly review should include frequent reviews of the continuing validity of the strategy and the measures being used.
Where a formal planning approach is taken towards strategy formulation, the underlying assumptions of the organisation’s strategy should be challenged by the reported outcomes of the strategy implementation. This is the process of ‘double loop’ organisational learning (Argyris, 1991). Feedback information should cause changes to the strategy formulation process. As one research interviewee stated about the Balanced Scorecard,
‘My goal … is to use this as a strategic tool and ask, ‘why are we off on that particular measure? Are we measuring the right thing? Is it what we are doing is never going to deliver a good result, or is there something else going on here?’… and using it to inform and have an informal discussion about where we should be putting resource going forwards.’
In some cases, the Balanced Scorecard reporting framework may indicate that the selected strategy will not deliver the desired outcomes and a change of thinking may be required. The double feedback loop is the final stage of the Scorecard cycle with any requirement for change to the strategy triggering the sequence of actions described for the original strategy formulation.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Communication, Action, Reporting & Feedback 33
Key Points:
● The Balanced Scorecard provides a common language for communicating strategy.
● One of the key steps in translating strategy into action is making sure every member of the organisation understands their role.
● Demands for disclosure are growing in both the public and private sectors.
● Few of the organisations studied had a formal process for capturing stakeholder input.
● If the Scorecard process is to succeed there must be an enabling culture that encourages openness and collaborative methods.
● Measurements need to be reliable, verifiable and have their strategic validity regularly checked.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard34
Although the primary focus of the research was on commercial enterprises, it was noted that new Government policies were challenging public sector organisations to take account of the views of a wider range of stakeholders. Although Government guidance notes on stakeholder frameworks for performance information cite the Balanced Scorecard, they only provide limited information on implementation techniques. Furthermore, the published textbooks on the Balanced Scorecard tend to focus on private sector organisations and do not fully satisfy the requirements of a public sector organisation seeking to implement a Scorecard process. This chapter attempts to fill this gap by exploring the background to these policy changes and uses examples drawn from a Health Action Zone (HAZ) to highlight some of the key issues in developing a public sector scorecard. The examples from the HAZ in this chapter are complemented by the case studies of English Nature and Mersey Travel that are detailed in the appendices.
For those readers not familiar with the detailed, and ever changing, NHS structure, Health Action Zones (HAZs) are local partnerships between the health service, local authorities, voluntary groups and local businesses. These zones cover inner-city, rural and former coalfield communities, and focus on issues such as programmes to stop smoking, children and young people’s health, mental health, older people’s health and the health of ethnic minorities. At the time of this research there were 26 Health Action Zones (HAZs) in deprived areas of England and four in Northern Ireland. There were similar programmes in Scotland where the Scottish Executive supported 48 Social Inclusion Partnerships.
In the sample Health Action Zone (HAZ), the area has a declining industrial base and social infrastructure. The main local industry is in a state of near collapse and there are fears that central Government may no longer believe that it is possible to regenerate the area. It has been noted that inner- city general practitioners (GPs) will have to be involved and committed to a number of the proposed projects. However, project leaders report that the ratio of GPs to patients is low and practice vacancies are not being filled. They also report that a significant number of GPs are not complying with agreed protocols.
Another of the HAZ projects focuses on developing a mental health framework to deal with vulnerable users of mental health services residing in the community. The balance between treatment and community safety is often a delicate and politically charged issue. In this particular HAZ the issue is exacerbated by the fears of one ethnic group that social services and the police may use the mental health process as an agent of social control.
This Health Action Zone is also endeavouring to introduce ‘a whole systems approach’ to the recuperation and rehabilitation of elderly discharged patients.
Stakeholder Measurements and Government Policies Recent government reforms have concentrated on improving management performance in the public sector. The origins of these reforms can be traced to two initiatives in the Thatcher and Major administrations – Compulsory Competitive Tendering (CCT) and the Citizen’s Charter. CCT was applied in successive waves to a wide range of local government services, starting with blue-collar services in 1980 (e.g. roads and housing repairs). The Citizen’s Charter was a specific initiative of the new Major government in 1991. It capitalised upon the public’s discontent with government and the need (expectation) for more open, responsible, and accountable government.
The Labour government accelerated this process and set out a comprehensive programme of reform for the public sector to ensure that citizens could participate in government and exert pressure for continuous improvement. This is often described as ‘stakeholder participation’ and reliable performance information is a cornerstone of this reform strategy.
There is a common and coherent theme to the government approach to performance measurements and this is captured by the acronym FABRIC:
● Focused ● Appropriate ● Balanced ● Robust ● Integrated ● Cost effective
This theme is replicated in the high level Public Service Agreements (PSAs) and Service Delivery Agreements (SDAs) that the Government has published for every government department.
6. Stakeholder Balanced Scorecards: Examples from the Public Sector
The Best Value regime is a government innovation designed to replace CCT. In essence Best Value allows public authorities to set the level and standards of the service they provide. The measurement of ‘Best Value’ and the ability of councils to demonstrate this value will be critical to the success of this initiative. There is a range of dimensions against which ‘Best Value’ will be assessed.
The aim of the best value process is to secure continuous improvements in performance. Councils are expected to demonstrate that they have taken account of the '4Cs': Challenge, Compare, Consult and Compete.
As described in earlier chapters, private sector organisations formulate strategy to seek competitive advantage and create value for shareholders. They seek to do this by maximising existing opportunities and by developing innovative products and processes they anticipate will be required in their future environment. Public sector organisations have to take a more bounded approach to strategy development as their strategic priorities are laid out in Government policy and cascaded in a structured process as illustrated in Figure 9.
Figure 9: Cascading Planning in the Public Sector 7
Consequently, where the private sector has to give emphasis to, and be highly innovative in, formulating competitive strategy, the public sector has to be highly innovative in how it achieves its performance targets and meets its service delivery agreements.
7 Source: Choosing the Right Fabric – HM Treasury
6.1 Organisational Structures In any complex organisation the primary focus and priorities will change at different managerial levels and for different divisions. In our examples the organisations have taken an orthodox approach. The governing board and functional heads form a top team to decide on strategy and decide on priorities which are then cascaded down through the organisation. This group is referred to as the corporate team. If, as is likely, the emphasis of the corporate team is to be on governance, then a key issue that must soon be addressed, is the degree of involvement that the corporate team will have in the day-to-day operations of the subordinate management areas. There is much to commend pushing decision making out to the point of service delivery, and the organisations we studied adopted this approach. The corporate teams took responsibility for translating the bold aspirations of the policy documents into a coherent set of performance measures and targets with suitably rigorous performance reviews. They then formed project teams. These were for distinct streams of work designed so those individuals best placed to ensure delivery of targets, had real ownership for doing so.
6.2 Ownership of Targets One of the first steps in ensuring ‘ownership’ of targets in any organisation is to ensure that its stakeholders share, as far as it is possible, a common understanding of the policy requirements and the values that will be needed to promote their attainment. This will help to create a shared purpose and help others understand: ● What must be accomplished; ● Why the work is worthwhile; and ● How the goals can be accomplished.
The organisations studied understood that the quadrants and measures in the Scorecard must be relevant to the employees whose behaviour they were seeking to change. They addressed this issue by constructing a ‘corporate’ Scorecard that reflected the values and beliefs; the bold aspirations, strategic aims and priorities; the key areas of action and the required time for their achievement. This corporate framework then became an overarching template that guided subordinate groups in developing their own Scorecards whilst ensuring a coherent set of performance measures and targets.
6.3 Building Corporate Balanced Scorecards To develop a corporate framework the corporate team needed to develop a deep understanding of the issues facing the organisation. Essentially, this is the process of establishing the conceptual and operational model of the organisation; the narrative that explains how value is created and delivered, based on strategy, stakeholder interests, ongoing management initiatives, and other contemporary frameworks such as ‘Best Value’.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard 35
Detailed Aims & Objectivities Service Delivery Agreements
The Organisation’s Strategy Business Plans
Business Group Plans Internal plans, projects and performance
measures standards
Individual Staff Performance & Accountability Plans Staff performance development and
performance appraisal
Strategic Priorities Public Service Agreements
PSAs
Strategic Themes
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Stakeholder Balanced Scorecards36
6.3.1 Step one should include the following: ● Define the scope of the corporate Scorecard project; ● Understand strategic issues facing the organisation using
whole systems analysis; ● Understand higher level guidelines, policies, strategic
priorities; ● Define the Scorecard architecture – the design principles
leading to the development of a template. There should be a focus on the critical business issues (CBI’s). CBI’s are the highest priority problems and opportunities that must be addressed if the strategic vision is to be fulfilled, and represent organisational level challenges; and
● Use strategic mapping to highlight the CBI’s.
It is important that this first step achieves the focus of identifying the key actions to be addressed and the processes that are needed to include stakeholders. Most importantly of all, however, there should be a focus on what tangible results
will need to be achieved and how such results will be demonstrated. In other words, the eventual Scorecard should be readily understood and accepted by the range of stakeholders. The measures will also have to be coherent and reinforce each other in the drive towards the organisation’s strategic goals. Strategy mapping is a useful tool for explicating the various cause and effect hypotheses and identifying any perverse measures. Kaplan and Norton [2004] confirm that strategy mapping is one of the more powerful tools for generating a clear overview of an organisation’s strategy and the associated measures.
The example strategy map on the following page illustrates how the Health Action Zone’s strategic themes are linked with complimentary measures in each of the Scorecard quadrants. The map gives a clear overview of the strategy and illustrates how the proposed measures reinforce each other.
Citizen Perspective
New Industries &
Improved Environment
GP Initiatives & Projects
Safer Communities
Care Initiatives
Improved Access
Waiting Times
Financial Perspective
Maximise EC & Government
Funding
Maximise GP Funding
Incentives for Community Initiatives
Secure Funds for Patient
Initiatives
Internal Process Perspective
Mobilise Political
Stakeholders
Improve GP / Patient
Ratios
Improve Productivity
Introduce Innovative Processes
Improve Ratings
Learning & Growth
Improve Quality and Provision of Information
Increase Staff Communication
Skills
Identify & Close Skill
Gaps
Encourage Staff Ideas
Support Staff
Training
Social & Industrial Viability
Increased Involvement of General
Practitioners
Implement New Mental
Health Framework
Improve Patient
Experience
Figure 10: A Strategy Map for Health Action Zone
6.3.2 Step Two – Draft the Scorecard The second step is to design a draft Scorecard and this process replicates the procedure for private sector organisations described in Chapter 4. The key features are as follows:
● Review the Scorecard architecture; ● Build a draft Scorecard with preliminary performance
dimensions and measures; and ● Develop a workshop package for use with a wider team of
stakeholders.
The above process will lead to the definition of a preliminary corporate Balanced Scorecard; the definition of a Scorecard template that can be deployed in other areas of the organisation; the identification of Critical Success Factors (CSFs) and their associated measures – Key Performance Indicators (KPIs). CSFs are the variables that will most influence the organisation’s future performance and one or more CSFs will normally be related to a Critical Business Issue (CBI).
When defining measures the following points should be considered:
● Do we have a balanced set of coherent measures covering all dimensions of the Scorecard?
● Do the measures reinforce each other? ● Are the measures acceptable, and fit for purpose? ● Are the measures likely to encourage people to do the
things we want them to do? ● Can each measure be implemented in a reasonable time
frame and at an acceptable cost? ● Does each measure have an owner; someone accountable
for its implementation and operation? ● Do we have a management process for reviewing measures
and ensuring they stimulate purposeful action?
A typical Corporate Scorecard may contain the quadrants and measures illustrated in Figure 11.
Our example Health Action Zone (HAZ) had eight major streams of work and each stream of work needed to be represented as a process on the Balanced Scorecard. These streams of work were at different levels of development and this guide has used the development of the project for the recuperation and rehabilitation of older citizens after hospitalisation to illustrate the Scorecard process.
The recuperation and rehabilitation stream of work was driven by evidence that the process was not meeting the needs of the elderly and was placing unnecessary financial burdens on the social service budget. Considerable work needed to be done to scope the extent of the problem and begin to develop a more co-ordinated and focused response across a range of health authority, hospital trust and social service departments. The issue for the HAZ corporate team was to identify the critical dimensions of each stream of work according to its stage of development, as achieving the status of a ‘managed’ process was an explicit objective.
Comparing the current stage of development of each stream of work against the attributes of a ‘managed’ process gave some indication of the process dimensions, but it is emphasised that these are dynamic and will change as the stream of work moves towards the objective of becoming a ‘managed’ process.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Stakeholder Balanced Scorecards 37
Stakeholder and Financial Measures
● Measures relating to key stakeholder groups ● Financial performance measures
Internal Processes
● Measures of process efficiency and effectiveness
Customers/Service Users
● Measures of customer perception of service effectiveness
● Objective customer measures
Learning and Growth
● Employee opinion measures ● Employee competency measures
Figure 11: Typical Corporate Scorecard Quadrants and Measures
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Stakeholder Balanced Scorecards38
Table 7 illustrates the early planning stages of developing process measures for the recuperation and rehabilitation of the elderly after hospitalisation.
6.3.3 Stakeholder and Financial Measures Quadrant The focus here is on ‘stakeholder relationship management’ and the stewardship and accountability of public funds. The concepts of critical success factors (CSFs) and critical business issues (CBIs) are useful in developing stakeholder and financial measures. On completing its whole systems scanning and analysis, the corporate team of the Health Action Zone identified a number of critical success factors and linked critical business issues. The HAZ provided the following example of a stakeholder measure: The area has a declining industrial base and social infrastructure. The main local industry is in a state of near collapse and it is feared that the central government may no longer believe that it is possible to regenerate the area.
The critical issues for the HAZ corporate team were as follows:
CSF: Development of shared understanding of issues across key stakeholder groups. KPI: Agreement on identified and prioritised list of critical success factors and critical business issues by steering group representing key stakeholder groups.
CSF: Mapping and understanding of existing process using flowcharting techniques. KPI: Development of a detailed process map and identification of workloads and any discontinuities.
The following sections describe how critical success factors and key performance indicators were developed for each quadrant of the Scorecard.
Process Attribute
High level values and mission statement ● Consistent with core objectives and core values of the
HAZ programme.
Quantifiable outcome target(s) ● Represents achievements of the values and mission
statement. ● Contributes significantly to the overall aims of the
HAZ. ● Represents ‘Best Value’ in terms of the resources being
allocated.
Quantifiable output target(s) ● With demonstrable and significant causal links with
the outcome targets. ● Which are integrated into an effective performance
management process.
Description of the process and significant sub-processes ● Which is mapped. ● Critical sub-processes named. ● Allocates roles and responsibility.
Stream of work stage of development
● Values and mission statement developed in consultation with professional stakeholder groups.
● HAZ board has a provisionally ‘signed off’ statement but requested further consultation with representatives of carers and elderly.
● Target groups identified and quantifiable targets agreed. Outcomes consistent with values and mission statement and with the potential to make significant impact across a wide range of clinical, health care and social areas.
● Identify potential significant resourcing issues for particular clinical areas, then Challenge, Compare, Consult and Compete.
● The causal links between discharge, community support, elderly independence and the long term financial consequences are increasingly being understood.
● Once the causal links are more fully understood targets that can be integrated into an effective programme will be developed.
● Exist as a series of separate clinical, social service and administrative procedures.
● Not yet seen as continuous process, conflicting professional and budgetary issues.
● Roles and responsibilities exist with current procedures.
Table 7: Recuperation and rehabilitation of the elderly after hospitalisation
● CBI: Withdrawal or reduction in government funds would have a dramatic impact on the HAZ ability to motivate local political and community leaders.
● CSF: The need to maintain the motivation, commitment and involvement amongst political stakeholders and leaders of community groups.
● Measure/KPI: Allocation of central government and EU funds across a wide spectrum of areas in comparison with an identified ‘family’ of similar areas.
6.3.4 Internal Processes The processes are the ‘service delivery systems’ for strategic goals, which the HAZ resolved into work streams or projects. The work streams might be at different stages of development and there needs to be a mechanism to move some items from concept and aspirations to ‘managed processes’.
Initially the problem for the corporate team may be the disparate nature of the development of the various streams of work. These will vary considerably; some will be:
● Relatively mature but not ‘managed’ processes, especially where the work crosses institutional and professional boundaries;
● Ad hoc and fragmented, existing as clinical and non-clinical procedures without any process focus or ownership; or
● Non-existent either as a stream of work or clinical or non- clinical procedure.
In order to become a ‘managed’ process each stream of work needs to have the following attributes:
● High level values and a mission statement consistent with the core objectives and core values of the Health Action Zone programme;
● Quantifiable outcome target(s) – what an organisation is trying to achieve, i.e. better health;
● Represents achievement of the values and mission statement which contributes significantly to the overall aims of the Health Action Zone;
● Represents ‘Best Value’ in terms of the resources being allocated;
● Quantifiable output target(s) – the final products produced by the organisation for delivery to the customer, e.g. operations;
● Demonstrable and significant causal links with the outcome targets which are integrated into an effective performance management process;
● A description of the process and sub-processes (sometimes called the ‘value chain’) that will deliver the output and cause the outcome to be achieved in the targeted group (community, etc), which is mapped, e.g. using a high level flowcharting technique;
● The naming of critical sub-processes (sub-systems); and ● The allocation of roles and responsibility for the process
and critical sub-processes.
The use of the process quadrant will allow a HAZ corporate team to continually evaluate its various streams of work irrespective of their state of development. It will allow early discussion on the viability of projects that encounter difficulty in the translation of aspiration into action. A fundamental test for the implementation team was to assess if the stream of work had the capability and capacity to achieve its outcome target?
Irrespective of the current stage of development of a stream of work, at some point it will need to become a ‘managed’ process if it is to achieve its full potential. This means that the information on the HAZ corporate Scorecard will need to be dynamic and show different information in relation to each stream of work and its stage of development. At some point when all the streams of work have achieved the level of a ‘managed process’, then the process dimension will focus on outcome and output targets.
6.3.6 Learning and Growth The scale of the challenge presented to all HAZs clearly indicates that they will need to develop new organisational competencies and capabilities if they are to achieve their objectives. Indeed they may need to ‘unlearn’ existing values, skills and abilities. This quadrant addresses critical performance gap issues that would adversely impact on the achievement of the strategic objectives:
● Any significant gap between current performance and current requirements which cannot be effectively addressed through existing procedures; and
● The gap in competencies and capabilities between the current organisation and the competencies and capabilities required to achieve the HAZs long-term strategic objectives.
The HAZ, therefore, has to have a clear understanding of its current and future performance requirements. Essential to this is some form of rigorous and objective audit of the current organisation and its performance. There are a number of ways this could be achieved, for example:
● Whole systems to be scanned and analysed to identify and prioritise environmental challenges which will impact on the achievement of the strategic objectives, and indicate where the HAZ needs to learn how to work differently or acquire new competencies and capabilities; and
● The European Foundation for Quality Management (EFQM) ‘Business Excellence Model’ to enable individual HAZs to objectively self-assess themselves against a recognised objective criteria and begin to benchmark their performance against other HAZs or relevant best practice elsewhere.
The HAZ case study highlighted that the corporate team should have an overall ‘organisational development strategy’ to ensure that the learning dimensions are firmly focused on the strategic objectives of the Health Action Zone and overall responsibility for this element of the strategy should be assigned to a team member.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Stakeholder Balanced Scorecards 39
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Stakeholder Balanced Scorecards40
The degree to which the HAZ will need to learn new competencies and capabilities will depend not only on the gap between current and future organisational needs but also the speed of environmental change and the emergence of new threats and opportunities. Traditional diagnostic systems focus on the gap between current organisational requirements and current competencies and capabilities. The dynamic and turbulent environment within which the HAZ programme works suggests a need for some form of early warning system e.g. scenario planning, to prepare the HAZ for conditions not anticipated in the traditional business planning process. This requirement should be built into the learning dimensions.
6.3.7 Customers (Citizens, Service Users) At the corporate level, the team is not attempting to track the perceptions and experience of all the customers of its various streams of work. Rather it is measuring the perceptions of the community in relation to the core objectives and core values (where directly relevant to customers) of the HAZ programme.
In shaping the focus of this measurement the HAZ will inevitably take into account the focus of its streams of work. For example, in the HAZ studied, a main stream of work concerned diabetes in its South Asian community. It had to develop a range of approaches for assessing the community’s perception and experience, not only in relation to diabetes, but also to the more strategic issues. In this sense, the diabetes service becomes a proxy measure of improving health and reducing inequalities.
6.3.8 Presentation of Key Performance Indicators For the process described in the previous paragraph to be effectively monitored, key performance indicators (KPIs) had to be developed. The conceptual model presented in Table 8 illustrates the KPIs that were used.
Stakeholders and Financial Measures
● Position on league of local authorities receiving UK & EU grants
● Ratio of GP/patients in inner city ● No. and duration of GP vacancies ● Ratio of ethnic users of mental health services ● Exception reports across all work streams of issues
critical to the management of stakeholder relationships
Internal Processes
● Diabetes (i) Board agreement on realistic output targets (ii) Development of process map with output targets
● Recuperation and rehabilitation (i) Stakeholder agreement of CSFs and CBIs (ii) Development of comprehensive process map (iii) Modelling to test performance of critical variables
● Reduction in teenage pregnancies (i) % of target group involved, degree of satisfaction
and quality of data acquired (ii) Production of focused social research
Customers (Citizens/Service Users)
● Knowledge and access to diabetic services by targeted groups
● Increase in satisfaction with diabetic services amongst targeted group and families
● Degree of belief in involvement of development of new diabetic services by targeted group and families
● Degree to which targeted groups feel a service has been developed to their special needs
Learning and Growth
● Development of a programme to increase HAZ staff involvement in the community and develop their overall skills
● Developing cross disciplinary and cross organisational management skills
● Improving diabetes best practice amongst relevant primary and secondary clinicians
Table 8: Typical Key Performance Indicators for a Corporate Scorecard
Customers
Financial
As mentioned in Section 6.1, in any complex organisation the primary focus and priorities will change at different managerial levels and for different departments. The HAZ in the study cascaded the strategy down through the organisation by developing project scorecards for the critical business issues (CBIs) identified in the Corporate Scorecard. Figure 12 illustrates this process.
Figure 12: Cascading Scorecards
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Stakeholder Balanced Scorecards 41
Organisation Vision
Public Service Agreement
Internal Business Process
Learning & Growth
Corporate Scorecard
Customers
Financial
Internal Business Process
Learning & Growth
Project Scorecard
Customers
Financial
Internal Business Process
Learning & Growth
Project Scorecard
Recuperation and Rehabilitation of the Elderly
Diabetes Care
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Stakeholder Balanced Scorecards42
6.4 Project Scorecard Template In the example studied, a project team was given the responsibility for each stream of work and a Scorecard was developed for each team. To ensure a coherent approach the same four quadrants provided the framework for the project level Scorecard:
1. Stakeholder and Financial Measures 2. Internal Processes 3. Learning and Growth 4. Customers and Service Users
The concept of critical success factors (CSFs) and critical business issues (CBIs) is equally relevant to a Project Balanced Scorecard. The existence of high level values, a mission statement, and quantifiable outcome targets, provide a good foundation upon which to build and maintain the project focus. It will also be seen from the development of the Corporate Balanced Scorecard that at a project level these criteria may well be in an emerging and developmental state. The process may well be more ‘messy’ and integrative than traditional linear project planning.
The measures used in the various quadrants of the Project Balanced Scorecard are described in the following sections.
6.4.1 Stakeholder and Financial Measures Rather than the concept of stewardship and accountability for public funds, the financial perspective of the Project Scorecard may focus on managerial accountability for allocated resources to action a specific task. Stakeholder relationship management remains important with perhaps more emphasis being given to professional, service recipient and community interest groups. The following description of the development of the stakeholder and financial measures of a project Scorecard for the recuperation and rehabilitation of the elderly, illustrates the key steps.
1. Although clinical and social care procedures for the discharge and assessment of needs of elderly patients existed, there was evidence that the approach was dislocated and not ‘patient focused’. Developing a whole- systems perspective amongst those involved (including carers) increased the likelihood of a more effective and seamless process being designed and implemented.
CBI: The benefits of a new procedure may not be equally distributed amongst the key stakeholder groups. There may be adverse cost and resourcing implications for some groups. CSF: Enthusiastic and committed involvement of all relevant stakeholder groups in whole system event(s) to identify the CSFs and CBIs in the current recuperation and rehabilitation procedures. KPI: Involvement of the key stakeholders in whole system event(s) and agreement on CSFs and CBIs of current procedures.
2. More effective involvement of family carers in the recuperation and rehabilitation process would have a dramatic impact on: the quality of life of discharged patients; and on stretched social service budgets. Understanding how to support carers is also important.
CBIs: Carers often perceive themselves as a secret underclass. Their lifestyle and domestic pressures do not facilitate their active long-term involvement with traditional healthcare and social service procedures. CSF: Development of a process that would make more effective use of carers. A particular objective would be to design a more effective and cost effective package of carer support measures. KPI: Early identification of a resourced support package that would encourage carers to become more actively involved within the recuperation and rehabilitation process.
6.4.2 Processes Developing the Corporate Scorecard entailed describing each stream of work as a high level process and detailing the critical sub-processes. This became the foundation for developing the KPIs in the process quadrant for each project Scorecard. To ensure that the project team can assess whether the total work of the sub-processes will collectively achieve the high level objectives of the project, the sub- processes need to be described in detail using flowcharting and modelling techniques. The following format could be used for each sub-process.
a) Objective of the sub-process should be: ● Consistent with the values and mission statement of
the process e.g. diabetes. b) Quantifiable sub-process output targets should:
● Represent achievement of the objectives of the sub- process;
● Contribute significantly to the overall objectives of the whole process;
● Represent ‘Best Value’ in terms of the resources being utilised; and
● Integrate into an effective performance management process.
c) A description of the sub-processes and critical tasks that will deliver the output to the next sub-process or to the end customer should: ● Be mapped e.g. using detailed flowcharting techniques; ● Identify critical tasks in sub-process; and ● Allocate roles and responsibility for the sub-process and
critical tasks.
The project team assessed the development and performance of each sub-process against these KPIs, which became the milestones in the development of the ‘managed’ sub-process, and monitored the performance against output targets.
Key Points:
● In any complex organisation the primary focus and priorities will change at different employee levels and in different divisions.
● One of the first steps in ensuring ownership of targets is to ensure that all stakeholders have a common understanding of the policy requirements and the values that will be needed to promote their attainment.
● Critical Business Issues (CBI) are the highest priority problems and opportunities that must be addressed if the strategic vision is to be fulfilled.
● Critical Success Factors (CSF) are the variables that will most influence future performance and will normally be related to a CBI.
● The eventual Scorecard design will need to have the quality of being readily understood and accepted by a wide range of stakeholders.
6.4.3 Learning At the project level, the learning quadrant will be concerned with developing the competencies of individuals and groups of individuals. Approaches such as ‘whole systems scanning and analysis’ and the Business Excellence Model are still relevant at this level in identifying performance gaps. Additional use can be made of training needs analysis (TNA) in relation to individuals and groups, particularly with reference to clinical and professional developments. For example:
Recuperation and rehabilitation CSF: New home assessment procedures will require a training programme for social services personnel. KPI: Development of a training programme that will transfer required skills to social services personnel.
6.4.4 Customers (Citizens, Service Users) The focus of the Project Scorecard in the early stages of the HAZ project was on obtaining customer (citizen, service recipient) experiences and perceptions about an existing service, and identifying customer needs to be met by any new or modified service. Later, the assessment was concerned with the outcomes of the project, the impact on experiences, and customers’ perceptions in terms of the service delivered. The customer quadrant is therefore dynamic and needs to be carefully tailored to the stage of development and performance of the project concerned. For example:
Recuperation and rehabilitation: CSF: Accurate assessment of elderly patients on discharge. (Inaccurate assessment has been identified as impacting on the continuing quality of life of the elderly and on the social services budget.) KPIs: Increase in perceived quality of life amongst discharged elderly patients. Percentage change in social service spending per discharged elderly patient.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Stakeholder Balanced Scorecards 43
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard44
The organisations that participated in this study are perceived as being prominent in their sectors and they represent a broad spectrum of organisational types in both the public and private arenas. The organisation members who participated in interviews and responded to the survey were quite senior in their organisation’s hierarchy. In both the private and public sectors, the interviewees were functional specialists tasked with implementing and promoting the Balanced Scorecard in their respective organisations. The private sector interviewees, although very senior, were generally at a level below the main or corporate board. The public sector interviewees, although answerable to management boards or other authorities, were amongst the most senior of the functional specialists operating in their field.
As all of the participants were, or had been, tasked with implementing a Balanced Scorecard in their organisations, it is not all that surprising that they were generally supportive of the Scorecard system. Nevertheless, many had encountered difficulties with implementation and the most common difficulties have been highlighted.
7.1 Innovation Fatigue Perhaps the most widespread difficulty reported, particularly in public sector organisations, was that of ‘Innovation Fatigue’. Many of the organisations in the study had been through a series of change programmes and had implemented some form of quality or total quality programme. The public sector organisations were either the result of, or had experienced, significant recent structural changes.
Chapter 4, Balanced Scorecard Implementation, highlighted some of the ways in which the participating organisations overcame ‘innovation fatigue’ and staff concerns about change. The case studies and indeed the Balanced Scorecard literature confirm that two fundamental pre-requisites of a successful implementation are:
● Executive Commitment and Leadership ● A strong and charismatic Scorecard Champion
7.2 Executive Commitment A number of the Scorecard champions from the private sector reported that although their main board directors were supportive of the Scorecard initiative, they did not fully embrace the measures. This reportedly gave rise to a sense that the Balanced Scorecard measures were for middle managers, whilst the main board would continue to concentrate on the more traditional financial ratios favoured by stock market analysts and other financial experts.
Conversely, the organisations highlighted as examples of best practice and radical improvement in the established Balanced Scorecard literature, had secured total commitment at every level of the organisation. A number of the organisations interviewed had attempted to gain the highest levels of approval by demonstrating the benefits of the Scorecard in pilot schemes in a division or department. However, the most successful schemes were those that were instigated by a Chief Executive who had heard of, attended a conference or seminar on, or previously implemented a Balanced Scorecard process.
Although the interviewees invariably saw the lack of ‘executive commitment’ as a substantial communication problem, there may be more fundamental issues. Many organisational leaders have become tired of an ever- increasing portfolio of new management initiatives that appear to offer a quick and all embracing solution to their problems. These concerns are often heightened when the systems are intensively marketed and appear to develop their own ‘high priests and gurus’.
7.3 The Scorecard as a Flexible Framework As highlighted in the introductory paragraphs to this guide, a number of expert commentators have suggested that the Balanced Scorecard is not all that new or that there are alternative and equally viable models. There is undoubtedly a wide range of performance measurement models and this guidebook sets out to explain the Balanced Scorecard rather than to simply promote the system.
Nevertheless, the principles of the Balanced Scorecard appear to be well grounded in the earlier works of experts such as Argyris, Hopwood, Ridgeway and others. Perhaps doubts could be resolved if the Scorecard was seen as a well ‘thought through’ and designed framework that easily embraces a broad spectrum of traditional and innovative measures.
In this way, instead of having one set of measures for the main board and another for middle managers, organisations could agree measures that fully reflect their strategy and that are appropriate for all levels of the organisation. The research highlighted the flexibility and adaptability of the Balanced Scorecard and this is illustrated in Figure 6: Conformance with the Generic Scorecard Design.
7. Common Threads and Conclusions
7.4 Commonly Utilised Measures The Commonly Utilised Performance Measures in UK Scorecards illustrated in Table 4 show the enduring popularity of financial measures and the relatively low focus on softer measures such as employee satisfaction. It should be noted that this table was drawn from a largely private sector sample and the results could be quite different if a wider sample of public sector organisations was included.
Nevertheless, the IIBFS findings are very similar to those reported by Frigo (2001) as arising out of the American Institute of Management Accountants 2001 survey. The survey of the Institute’s 1300 members was designed, inter alia, to examine the effectiveness of performance measures within the four perspectives of the Balanced Scorecard. The IMA survey highlighted that financial performance measures received high ratings, while customer, internal business process, and learning and growth measures received progressively lower ratings. As in the IIBFS survey, the learning and growth perspective received the lowest rating.
Frigo (2001) attributes these results to the difficulties of measuring intangibles and goes on to suggest ‘perhaps the greatest challenge managers face in performance measurement relates to intangible assets, specifically human capital and information capital’.
7.5 Value Creation through External Reporting Although Section 5.3 highlights some aspects of dealing with these ‘so called’ intangible assets, it focuses on the issues of internal communication and external communication in the context of transparency and governance. However, in the period since the research was carried out much more work has been performed on identifying how value can be created through external reporting. According to Epstein and Wisner (2001), powerful stakeholder groups, such as analysts, investors and customers, see non-financial measures as increasingly important in building a fuller picture of an organisation and its likely future performance. To emphasize this point, Epstein and Wisner cite Ernst & Young’s 1997 study, Measures that Matter. The report highlights that 35% of an investor’s decision making process is related to non- financial issues.
Customers seem to follow a similar pattern and the growth of ethical funds and other financial products, as well as consumers’ selection of ‘green products’, evidence this.
According to Epstein:
‘By externally disclosing a more comprehensive set of measures, company executives are seizing the initiative to describe the company’s strategy, set expectations, increase transparency, and ensure goal alignment between the company and its broad set of stakeholders’.
He then goes on to link this important aspect of internal communication:
‘Full accountability comes only when a company combines broad public disclosures with extensive internal performance reporting. By doing so, companies are creating value for all stakeholders whose support they need to prosper – customers, investors, employees, communities, the public, and regulators and government officials’.
Although the comments above are substantially aimed at private sector companies, they are equally, if not even more valid, to public sector organizations. As outlined in the introductory chapters, the present government has committed to a programme of public service modernisation with the clear objective of ensuring that citizens can participate in government and exert pressure for continuous improvement.
Much work has still do be done on ‘inclusion’ and developing mechanisms for all citizens to participate in government. Nevertheless, as demonstrated by the example of the Health Action Zone in Chapter 6, and English Nature in the appendices, the Balanced Scorecard, as well as being a strategy focusing tool, can provide a powerful instrument for communicating what the organisation values, what its programmes are and what progress is being made with improvement initiatives.
7.6 Mental Models and Building a Vision In Chapter 3, Balanced Scorecard Foundations, the research briefly touches on the issues of Vision and Values. The research highlighted that the process of agreeing on the vision and values helped to surface the mental models or deeply held assumptions that were being inculcated into employees of organisations. This appeared to be a particularly striking feature in public sector bodies. Senge’s (1990) book – ‘The Fifth Discipline’ – gives an extremely thought provoking and in depth analysis of the role of mental models and the need for building a shared vision. If an organisation’s Balanced Scorecard is to be sustained, sponsors need to follow the processes described in Chapter 3 to build such a vision. However they must be mindful that even if such a shared vision is constructed, if it is not fully supported, implemented, and clearly seen to work, there will be a tendency for the organisation to revert to the old established mental model.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard 45
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Common Threads and Conclusions46
7.7 Time Phasing The research noted that in relation to the models that seemed to work, neither the private nor the public sector organisations had fully thought through the time relationship between initiating an action and obtaining results. This was particularly so in public sector organisations where relatively long periods of time elapsed between action and results. Most of the organisations surveyed took some relatively easy actions – picked the low hanging fruit – to convince stakeholders that the process could deliver results. Norton (2001) provides an interesting description of the importance of ‘time phasing the strategy’ and he comments:
‘When we first conceived of the term ‘Balanced Scorecard’, our objective was to balance lag indicators (financial measures) with lead indicators (performance drivers). As we set out to uncover the performance drivers that help realise strategy; the lead indicators became more complex. That there are long lead indicators as well as short lead indicators is an important distinction, and one that has led to a more precise understanding of the role sub-strategies play in value creation’.
The best example of this balance of lead indicators uncovered by the research project was in the Health Action Zone described in Chapter 6. The team recognised that their streams of work were at different levels of development and adjusted their processes and measurements accordingly.
In conclusion, the fact that an organisation does not have a Balanced Scorecard, or measures some particular area of operation, does not necessarily mean it is neglecting that item. For example, just because an organisation does not have a set of well constructed external reporting measures on items such as environmental performance does not necessarily mean that it gives any less attention to these than a company that fully discloses this information in its Balanced Scorecard.
However, the Balanced Scorecard does provide a flexible framework that allows an organisation to make its strategy explicit and to communicate its values and operational performance in an entirely transparent and easily accessible format. The research demonstrates that it provides a powerful strategy-focusing tool and when closely linked to staff reward schemes it can be an extremely powerful tool for aligning the organisation with the strategic objectives and for delivering improvement.
Appendix 1
The Research Process The research work carried out by IIBFS on behalf of CIMA provides a significant insight into the use of the Balanced Scorecard in the UK. During the course of this research project the IIBFS directly contacted 591 private sector organisations and 51 public sector organisations. This element of the research was carried out using a telephone survey and the results are illustrated in Table 9.
Appendices
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard 47
Table 9: Determining the Frontiers of Balanced Scorecard Use in the United Kingdom
Telephone Survey of Private Sector Organisations
Balanced Scorecard Use Within the UK
Number of Companies Contacted 591
Number of Companies Using the Balanced Scorecard 91 (15.4%)
Number of Companies Not Using the Balanced Scorecard 258 (43.7%)
Total Number of Companies with a Performance Measurement System with Similar Characteristics to the Balanced Scorecard 62 (10.5%)
Total Number of Companies Unwilling or Unable to Take Part in the Telephone Survey 180 (30.4%)
Telephone Survey of Top 100 UK Corporates by Market Capitalisation
Balanced Scorecard Use Within the Top 100 Corporates
Number of Companies Using the Balanced Scorecard 30 (30.0%)
Number of Companies Not Using the Balanced Scorecard 29 (29.0%)
Total Number of Companies with a Performance Measurement System with Similar Characteristics to the Balanced Scorecard 11 (11.0%)
Number of Companies Unwilling or Unable to Take Part in the Telephone Survey 30 (30.0%)
Telephone Survey of UK Public Sector Organisations
Number of Public Sector Bodies Contacted 51
Number of Public Sector Bodies Using or Intending to Use the Balanced Scorecard Methodology 16 (31.4%)
Number of Public Sector Bodies Not Using the Balanced Scorecard 33 (64.7%)
Number of Public Sector Bodies Unwilling or Unable to Take Part in the Telephone Survey 2 (3.9%)
NB: The survey into Balanced Scorecard usage within the public sector was not a comprehensive exercise, merely a means of ascertaining how the approach to Balanced Scorecard design and implementation differed to the private sector in resolving shareholder/stakeholder tensions. As a result, only a relatively small sample of public sector bodies, local authorities and government agencies were contacted.
The telephone survey of 591 UK private sector corporations and other organisations, showed that some 15% of firms are actively applying the Balanced Scorecard.
The Balanced Scorecard is playing a significant role in the operation of private sector performance measurement in the UK. Of the largest 100 UK companies by market capitalisation (excluding financials), 30% are already actively engaging with the Balanced Scorecard performance measurement system. Recently, UK public sector authorities and agencies have also taken up the Balanced Scorecard approach, and of the sample considered by this telephone survey, 31% were utilising or intending to use the Balanced Scorecard.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Appendices48
A further part of the research project was a detailed postal questionnaire to which 60 of the targeted 200 companies, representing a wide spectrum of organisations from construction to retail banking, responded. One of the driving forces behind the development of the Balanced Scorecard was the growing realisation that contemporary organisations need to be aware of a much wider range of influences beyond those measured by traditional financial and accounting measures. They need to take account of the views of a wider range of stakeholders such as customers, suppliers, employees and neighbours.
Relative Ranking of Stakeholders As part of the research project, IIBFS analysed what importance respondents to the questionnaire attached to the interests of key customers, employees, the local community, senior management and the environment, in comparison to those of shareholders (or other owners). In all cases, a score of 0 indicates that the relevant stakeholder is relatively not important and a score of 7 indicates that the stakeholders’ interests are at least as important as those of shareholders. The relative rankings of the interests of stakeholders compared to the interests of shareholders are provided in Table 10 and further illustrated in Figure 13.
A Friedman Two-Way Analysis of Variance by Ranks test indicates a significant difference in the rankings of the interests of stakeholders (λ2 = 33.849). As Table 10 demonstrates, the interests of all other stakeholders were, on average, considered to be less important than those of shareholders. Given the shift to customer relationship management across the UK, it is not surprising that
Table 10: Stakeholder Rankings
Stakeholders’ Interests Mean Likert Relative to Shareholders score
Customers 5.48
Senior managers 5.11
Environment 4.64
Employees 4.50
Local community 4.12
respondents considered the interests of customers to be the most important compared to the interests of other stakeholders, excluding shareholders. 37% of respondents considered that the interests of key customers were at least as important as those of shareholders. What is perhaps surprising is that a greater percentage of respondents did not consider the interests of key customers to be as important as those of shareholders.
After customers, senior management was next in terms of importance compared to shareholders. However, the interests of other employees were ranked low in terms of relative importance, and even below that of environmental interests.
The clear pre-eminence of shareholders and key customers within the private sector sample provided an initial perspective on the motivation for, and potential application of, the Scorecard process within such organisations.
Figure 13: Stakeholder Rankings
Customer Senior managers Environment Employees Local community
% o
f o
rg an
is at
io n
s su
rv ey
ed
25
20
15
10
5
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Not important As important
Appendix 2
Case Study: English Nature
Overview English Nature is a public sector organisation responsible for managing many of England’s nature conservation areas, in particular, Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI). In recent years English Nature have transformed the science of nature conservation from a descriptive activity to a dynamic process focused on the notion of ‘wildlife gain’, an idea which could well be described as the ecological equivalent of EVA (Economic Value Added). This quiet revolution has led English Nature through a complete rethink of how the business of nature conservation should work, and this new understanding, or narrative, is now shared by every officer in the organisation and underpins the development of the organisation’s Balanced Scorecard.
Introduction English Nature was created in 1991 to promote the conservation of England’s wildlife and natural features. The organisation was established by the Environmental Protection Act 1990 and is a statutory body funded by the Department of the Environment, Transport and the Regions. Currently, English Nature manages an annual budget of around £45 million.
English Nature’s main areas of activity include:
● Providing advice and information on nature conservation to the Government and other organisations;
● Designating England’s most important areas for wildlife and natural features such as Sites of Special Scientific Interest, National Nature Reserves and Marine Nature Reserves and securing the sustainable management of these sites; and
● Implementing, on behalf of the government, international conventions and EC directives on nature conservation, including the government’s Biodiversity Action Plan in response to the 1992 United Nations Earth Summit in Rio.
Understanding “Wildlife Gain” English Nature has a distinctive organisational structure. The organisation chart shows a conventional management hierarchy: Chief Executive, Directors, General Managers and Teams. The 31 Teams are divided into three types: 21 Local Teams each assigned to a geographical area of England; four Specialist Teams focusing on environmental impacts, maritime, lowlands and uplands issues; and six Services Teams dealing with strategy, finance, HR, IT, marketing and external relations.
However, the work that English Nature undertakes is organised into seven business processes, which overlay the organisational structure. There are three primary processes corresponding to the three main classifications of natural area in England: Uplands, Lowlands and Maritime; together with four business support processes: Influencing Strategic Allies, Gaining Supporters, Direction & Reporting, and ‘Making English Nature Work Better’ (HR, IT and Finance).
There is, therefore, a matrix management system in place at English Nature. However, the usual problem in such systems of managing conflict between powerful ‘vertical’ functional interests and ‘horizontal’ processes hardly exists, since business processes are paramount and vertical functions have been eliminated from the hierarchy. For example, the Lowlands Process Director also manages HR as a strand of the ‘Making English Nature Work Better’ process and has no direct control over the HR Services Team.
In operating a matrix management system, activities at Local Team level are undertaken which may fall into multiple business processes. For example, the Devon & Cornwall team will operate within all three primary processes being located in a geographical area, which includes upland, lowland and maritime features.
A business process is described by Strategy Manager, Mark Felton, as, ‘a stream of work aimed at particular nature conservation outcomes’. Although the three primary business processes – Uplands, Lowlands and Maritime – are characterised by very different wildlife management issues, they share a common core of activities shown as a value chain in Figure 14, Primary Value Stream (PVS). This diagram represents a common approach to nature conservation in England. Each activity adds value as described in the boxes and the cumulative effect of these activities leads to the notion of ‘wildlife gain’. This is in contrast to a typical commercial organisation where each step of the value chain adds financial value leading to profit and an increase in shareholder value.
The definition of the Primary Value Stream represents the establishment of best practice and transforms nature conservation from a passive descriptive process (where historically the aim was merely to understand wildlife and to designate protected areas), to an active dynamic process characterised by positive management of protected sites leading to an ongoing improvement in the state of England’s wildlife.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Appendices 49
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Appendices50
Figure 14: The Primary Value Stream (PVS) (Adapted from the original)
Understand – Survey & Research
Wildlife understood through research papers
and survey results
Data supporting defensible decision making
Maps of rep potenti
Defensible priorities & targets
Gain knowledge & understanding
Prioritise & set objectives
Map – Locate & evaluate
W ild
lif e
Known quality
Validated management
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Appendices 51
presentative ial sites
Positive management Fulfilled reporting
obligations
Enforceable legal protection
Known condition
Designate / Declare Ensure appropriate
management Monitor Report
W ild
life G ain
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Appendices52
The Primary Value Stream (PVS) is a value chain and therefore represents a strategic view of the primary activities of the organization. As such, the PVS is a powerful aid in communicating the wildlife gain narrative – the ‘story’ of how value is created and delivered by English Nature. The PVS is also a source of Critical Success Factors (CSFs) and performance measures. However, the PVS is not the only device for explaining the narrative. As part of the information systems strategy, English Nature realised that it was vital to develop an IT system to support the management of wildlife based on the PVS. As part of this project, it became necessary to analyse the information requirements of the PVS and this resulted in the development of the data model shown in the Figure 15, Logical Data Structure for the Natural Areas Business of English Nature.
Business managers often have a natural aversion to IT data models which are usually rendered incomprehensible to mere mortals by the use of the Byzantine reasoning and fractured English required for computer programming. However the example shown below has been adapted for non-artificial intelligence! To understand the diagram the reader has merely to follow the arrows from one box to the next. For example, beginning at the top of the diagram, ‘England is sub- divided into Natural Areas’, ‘Natural Areas are made up of distinct Broad Habitats’, and so on.
By comparing the data model to the value chain expressed in the PVS, it is relatively easy to understand the English Nature narrative. England contains a large number of conservation areas consisting of important natural features and representative species. Each conservation area requires very specific management techniques. Each conservation area is owned or used by a range of people – Customers – and the challenge is to persuade these Customers to manage their conservation areas according to the recommended management regime. In so doing, the net result will be an overall improvement in both the biodiversity and sustainability of the local wildlife.
In addition to the primary business processes there are supporting business processes which also contribute to the critical success factors and performance measures of the organisation. Particularly important are the processes which focus on key external stakeholders, i.e. the processes of Influencing Strategic Allies and Gaining Supporters.
The net result of considering all seven of English Nature’s business processes is the definition of the 30 Critical Success Factors shown in Table 11, Balanced Scorecard Critical Success Factors. As can be seen from the table, the English Nature Balanced Scorecard is divided into six performance perspectives: Competent organisation, Growing the business, Image and reputation, Service to corporate strategic allies, Strategic change and Wildlife gain. These perspectives have been matched as far as possible to the Kaplan and Norton Balanced Scorecard, but differ significantly from the standard version due to the distinctive character and strategic intent of English Nature.
England
Natural Areas Key Species
Broad Habitats
Conservation Areas
Features Species
Customers
Units Condition
Assessment
Tenure Agreed
Management
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Appendices 53
is sub-divided into
are distinguished by
are made up of distinct
the best parts of which are designated as
are representative of
are designated as collections of
have a legal interest defined as
are capable of supporting
are monitored during visits resulting in
can be tied to designated land by nature of
for every influential manager there is
are divided for pragmatic reasons into
are managed according to
Figure 15: Logical Data Structure for the Natural Areas Business of English Nature
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Appendices54
Customer Perspective
Stakeholder Perspective
Internal Processes
Innovation & Learning
Supporting Processes
Strategic Change
Service to Corporate Strategic Allies (CSAs)
Image and reputation
Grow the business
Competent organisation
Wildlife Gain
1. Delivery of English Nature led Biodiversity Action Plans 2. Helping delivery of Biodiversity Action Plans by everyone 3. Favourable condition on conservation sites 4. Maintenance of Natural Area character
1. Changing the rules of the game in ten sectors 2. Developing and championing biodiversity tests for each 3. Preventing damage and facilitating enhancement 4. Resources to fund sustainable land and water management
and the care of the sea 5. Create a climate of public support for the need for rule
changes 6. Articulate the need for behavioural changes
1. Championing delivery of Natural Area objectives by local action
2. Helping CSAs deliver our objectives and theirs – exploit current rules of the game for most effective contribution to wildlife gain
3. Deliver Relationship Management Plan activities 4. Excellent service to support owner occupiers of SSSIs
1. Be an excellent public body; use resources wisely and effectively
2. Give sound advice which is acted upon by Government 3. Gain explicit support for nature conservation 4. Tell good stories
1. Maintain Grant in Aid (GIA) and flow of other funds 2. Become more efficient 3. Continuously improve delivery of services 4. Meet service standards 5. Manage National Nature Reserves excellently 6. Maintain Natural Area information
1. Have knowledge at our fingertips: sectoral, customer and nature conservation
2. Sound judgements and effective learning
1. Finance 2. Information 3. Human Resources 4. Facilities and assets
Table 11: Balanced Scorecard Critical Success Factors
Summary The development of the English Nature Scorecard illustrates an important factor in successful Balanced Scorecard design, namely that the standard four perspective Kaplan and Norton format is often inappropriate for many organisations. At English Nature there are a number of important influences leading to the development of a more distinctive performance management framework. Specifically:
● The perspective of Learning and Growth may often be divided into an array of perspectives such as HR issues concerning people’s attitudes and competencies, strategic change, or the development of intellectual property.
● There is often a clear business distinction between Customers – those served by the organisation – and other external stakeholders with the power to influence or even control the organisation. Where such distinctions are important it may be necessary to create separate Customer and Stakeholder perspectives.
● The notion of value may change between organisations. In commercial, for-profit organisations, value is always financial, but in non-commercial, not-for-profit organisations value may be defined differently as in the case of English Nature where the aim is to create ‘wildlife gain’.
The fact that the concept of ‘value’ to English Nature is concerned with wildlife gain and not with financial gain, is immaterial. An explicit shared understanding of how value is created and delivered within an organisation is required as a prerequisite for developing a successful Balanced Scorecard. Without this understanding it is not possible to be certain that the Scorecard contains an exact set of ‘key’ performance indicators – those indicators derived from the drivers of value, and no other superfluous measures. To take a legal parallel, a Balanced Scorecard should contain ‘the truth, the whole truth, and nothing but the truth!’
English Nature has employed an innovative and imaginative approach to developing and defining its narrative – the story of how value is created and delivered – using value chain analysis and IT data modelling. The result has been the development of a shared vision and shared understanding of the importance of business activities across the organisation. Having made this business knowledge explicit, English Nature has developed the means to create a highly sophisticated Balanced Scorecard that is both relevant to employees and of practical use in fulfilling the strategic intent of a unique organisation.
Appendix 3
Case Study: Merseytravel
Overview One of the characteristic features of the Balanced Scorecard is the emphasis placed on stakeholder interests. Most commercial company Scorecards focus solely on the expectations of shareholders, customers, employees and, to a lesser extent, suppliers, even though the same organisations would recognise the importance of other stakeholder groups such as regulators, the local community, and the ‘environment’.
The decision as to whether a particular stakeholder group should be represented in the Balanced Scorecard depends on the direct impact that the stakeholder group has on the day- to-day creation and delivery of value. Many stakeholder groups do not qualify as direct contributors to the Balanced Scorecard, but nevertheless they may often have an indirect impact on performance since they influence the other forces that shape the Balanced Scorecard – strategy, planning and operations.
In general, public sector organisations are required to deal with a broad spectrum of stakeholder interests which add a degree of complexity to the planning process that most private sector organisations would find bewildering. Merseytravel, the Passenger Transport Authority and Executive serving the County of Merseyside, is such an organisation and has to take account of the interests of 42 separate stakeholder groups in its planning process.
Introduction The origins of Merseytravel are complex. The Merseytravel Passenger Transport Authority (MPTA) and Merseytravel Passenger Transport Executive (MPTE) were first established under the 1968 Transport Act. Both became part of Merseyside County Council in 1974 although MPTE retained a separate identity. Merseytravel was re-established as the Passenger Transport Authority and Executive for the County of Merseyside in the Local Government Act 1985, and the Transport Act 1985 amended the functions to take into account bus deregulation and the privatisation of bus operations. Merseytravel employs around 800 people and manages a revenue budget of over £220 million and a capital budget of over £20 million.
Merseytravel ensures the availability of public passenger transport in Merseyside, including financial support for the rail network and the provision of bus services not covered by the private sector. It also promotes public transport by providing bus stations and infrastructure such as shelters, stops and operator travel information, comprehensive travel tickets and free travel with minor restrictions for the elderly and for those with mobility difficulties. Merseytravel also owns and operates the famous Mersey Ferries and Mersey Tunnels.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Appendices 55
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Appendices56
Merseytravel has developed some highly innovative transport solutions. An example is SMART, a unique package of high quality bus services. The original demonstration services were EU funded through the THERMIE programme. SMART brings together accessible low floor buses, high quality shelters, real time information screens and bus priority measures. The success of the pilot services has lead to the SMART concept being extended to the commercial network in partnership with the bus operators and District Councils.
Merseytravel is subject to Government legislation and has had to consider Government White Papers such as, ‘A New Deal for Transport’. This paper set out the government’s position on the future of transport. It contained a number of important issues relevant to Merseytravel including bus and rail services, safer routes to school and a national public transport information system.
A second White Paper, ‘Modern Local Government – In Touch with the People’ is aimed primarily at local government, but does affect Merseytravel since Merseytravel is classed as a Local Authority. The key issue in this White Paper, which affects the planning process and performance management, is the notion of ‘Best Value’.
In the late 1980s and 1990s local government was subjected to Compulsory Competitive Tendering (CCT). Under CCT, all Local Authorities were required to offer designated services for tender and the lowest cost tender is accepted. This policy delivered an important benefit – the reduction of service costs, but at the price, in many cases, of reduced customer satisfaction. Under Best Value, Local Authorities are required to address the issue of effectiveness as well as efficiency. Effectiveness is concerned with ensuring that services meet stakeholder expectations and this has underlined the importance of developing Merseytravel’s stakeholder analysis process.
Stakeholder Analysis Figure 16, Best Value Stakeholder Analysis, shows the 42 stakeholder groups that Merseytravel considers when making planning decisions. Stakeholders are by definition, groups, individuals or organisations that have an interest in the organisation. The analysis was originally formulated at a brainstorming session at which all business areas were represented. This information was supplemented with the findings of market research into various aspects of public transport provision across Merseyside, customer feedback and consultation with the community.
Stakeholder analysis forms a particularly important device in securing Best Value and the information forms a base from which to explore the service offered by Merseytravel and any gaps in service provision. The overall analysis assists in setting performance targets based on current service provision.
Behind each stakeholder group in the Best Value Stakeholder Analysis diagram there is a set of stakeholder expectations. For example, the stakeholder expectations of Shoppers, a sub- division of the Travelling Public stakeholder group, are:
● Frequent public transport services; ● Good interchange facilities (bus/train/ferry); ● Secure car parking at park and ride facilities (including
ferries); ● Flexible ticketing (discount, through ticketing), ● Reliable public transport services; ● Safe environment on public transport and at associated
facilities; ● Information on public transport services; ● Promotional tickets, e.g. offering travel and discount at
shops; ● Cross boundary travel opportunities; and ● Hand luggage storage facilities.
Merseytravel operates a market research programme, an important part of the process of understanding stakeholder expectations. There are two quarterly tracing surveys. One is a general survey across all customer groups and the other focuses on ‘opinion formers’ and is designed to provide feedback on policy issues.
Annual ongoing customer tracking surveys are conducted on the bus and rail network. In addition to these regular surveys, there will be, in any one year, a number of supplementary surveys. In 1999, for example, extra information was sought from the business community and young people, and a large scale consultation on perceptions of the Government’s Transport White Paper was undertaken. Merseytravel seeks to demonstrate progress by undertaking evaluation studies of recently completed infrastructure projects, for example, new railway stations and bus stations.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Appendices 57
Figure 16: Best Value Stakeholder Analysis
Source: Merseytravel (1998) Policy & Expenditure Plan 1999-2004
Employees of other Companies
Merseytravel Employees
European Commission
Mersey Tunnels Users
Professional Bodies
Travelling Public
Community Groups
Sales Agents
Political Bodies
Media
Audit
Suppliers
Other PTEs
Local Businesses
Local Public Transport
Operators
Elected Members of Merseytravel
Merseyside Districts
Politicians – National, Local
& European
Government Departments
Residents’ Associations
Cyclists
Advisory Panels
Pressure Groups
Pathways Groups
Schools
Students
Consessionary Travel
Commuters
Potential Travelling Public
Shoppers
Residents
Local Government Associations
Professional Organisations
Car Owners
Tourists
Job Seekers (New Deal)
Financial Institutions
Internal
District
Local
National
Tour Operators
Chambers of Commerce
Potential Inward Investors
Travel Operators – Regional & National
Liverpool Airport
Tourism, Leisure
Industrial
Commercial
M
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Appendices58
The Planning Process For the purposes of planning, Merseytravel is divided into nine Business Groups each with its own distinct internal or external market. The principal externally facing Business Groups accounting for over 80% of revenue expenditure are bus, rail, tunnels, ferries and travel concessions. The Business Groups comprise line managers and representatives from Finance, Transport Policy and Corporate Planning. To quote from the Merseytravel Business Planning Manual:
‘We encourage involvement in the process by giving the managers and key officers who run the businesses the responsibility of producing the plans. The Corporate Planning section helps Business Groups throughout the cycle, and their other tasks ensure involvement in implementing the organisation’s business strategy’.
And continuing from the same source:
‘We have designed the planning process to make the most of the knowledge and judgement of the participants so it is not solely a ‘numbers game’. We use tools such as Stakeholder and SWOT analysis, and our Stakeholder requirements and service offered framework adds real-life to any statistics we may have. So the contribution each member of staff can make, either directly or indirectly to the picture is vital.’
This view of an inclusive planning process focused on stakeholders, and particularly on customers, supports the introduction of the Best Value initiative. As David Parry, Head of Business Strategy explains:
‘We’re starting to prepare for Best Value. We’re focusing on the strategic management framework and adapting our existing systems in a direction that is compatible. We’re tightening up on the formulation of objectives and performance measurement and we’re starting to think how we organise the fundamental performance review process’.
The annual planning cycle itself is shown in Figure 17, The Business Planning Cycle. Strategic direction is set during Spring when the Strategic Plan, plus other guidance, is updated and business appraisals prepared. The business appraisal step results in the formulation of proposed plans set out in the Performance Plan and includes stakeholder analysis information. A Policy and Expenditure Plan is prepared for external consultation during Autumn along with Resource Bids containing implementation options. During Winter the budget is finalised.
In parallel with the business planning cycle there is also the ongoing process of monitoring and reporting progress against current plans. Business Groups meet at regular intervals, typically monthly, and receive reports on the performance of their budget and services. Progress is reviewed in relation to the implementation of business plan options and medium- term objectives.
Figure 17: The Business Planning Cycle
Source: Merseytravel (1998) Business Planning Cycle Manual
Strategic Direction
Budget Preparation
Consultation
Business Appraisal
Performance Plan
Resource Bids
Policy and Expenditure Plan
SPRING
W IN
T ER
AUTUMN
S U
M M
ER
The lead manager of each Business Group makes a formal report to the Management Team comprising the Chief Executive, other Directors plus the General Manager of the Tunnels on a two monthly cycle. Reports include financial and HR details, project implementation, service delivery and progress of medium-term objectives.
The Performance Plan is prepared within the context of the business strategy, recent commercial performance and the current stakeholder analysis. Because Merseytravel have implemented such a comprehensive stakeholder analysis process it is possible to readily identify the stakeholders that each planning proposal will affect and to ensure that likely impacts on these stakeholders are accurately assessed and proactively managed.
Summary Stakeholder analysis is an important part of the business planning process, and some stakeholder expectations may be so important that their fulfilment must be tracked on a continuous basis within the Balanced Scorecard. A small number of stakeholder groups impact on performance to such an extent that whole perspectives of the Balanced Scorecard must be dedicated to them. This explains why most, if not all, commercial organisations include Customer and Shareholder (Financial) perspectives in their company Scorecards along with a strong emphasis on employees in their Learning & Growth perspectives.
The design of the standard Kaplan and Norton Balanced Scorecard owes much to the so-called service value chain. This is based on the hypothesis that motivated employees lead to efficient and effective processes resulting in higher levels of customer satisfaction and improved shareholder value. This hypothesis is built around the key stakeholder groups of employees, customers and shareholders and therefore steers adopters of the standard Scorecard towards serving the needs of these key stakeholders.
For most commercial organisations a focus on these three stakeholder groups is often sufficient. However, no organisation should be blind to the possibility that other stakeholder interests may have a significant effect on performance and the exercise of stakeholder analysis is therefore recommended as part of any business planning process.
As the Merseytravel case illustrates, the value of stakeholder analysis is not confined to Balanced Scorecard design and content. A robust and effective stakeholder analysis process offers significant benefits to the annual planning process by allowing the impacts that projects are likely to have on stakeholders to be assessed during project appraisal thereby giving managers a much better chance of proactively managing these impacts during implementation.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard Appendices 59
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard60
Adams, C., and Roberts, P., 1993, ‘You Are What You Measure’. Manufacturing Europe, pp. 504- 07.
Aisthorpe, P., Littler, K., Hudson, R., and Keasey, K., 1997, An Objects Based Approach to Strategic Architecture and Balanced Scorecard Implementation. Working Paper Series, International Institute of Banking and Financial Services, Leeds University.
---------, 1998, From Performance Measurement Frameworks to Strategy Formulation Systems. In Performance Measurement Theory and Practice, Vol. 1, Cambridge: Judge Institute of Management Studies, pp. 7-14.
Becker, B.E., Huselid, M.A., and Ulrich, D., 2001, The HR Scorecard Linking People, Strategy, and Performance. Boston: Harvard Business School Press.
Birchard, B., 1996, ‘Where Performance Measures Fail’, CFO: The Magazine for Chief Financial Officers, 12(10), October, p. 36.
Boddy, D., and Buchanan, D., 1992, Take the Lead - interpersonal skills for project managers, Prentice Hall Europe.
Booth R., 1996, ‘The Blue Sky and Brown Field’, Management Accounting, 74(8), September, p.16.
Bromwich, M., 1990, ‘The Case for Strategic Management Accounting: The Role of Accounting Information for Strategy in Competitive Markets’, Accounting, Organisations and Society, January, pp. 27-46.
Bromwich, M., and Bhimani, A., 1994, Management Accounting: Pathways to Progress. London: The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants.
Brooke, D., ‘A model for implementing service excellence in the financial services industry’, Journal of Financial Services and Marketing, 7 (1), August pp. 42-53.
Butler, A., Letza, S., and Neale, W., 1997, ‘Linking the Balanced Scorecard to Strategy’, Long Range Planning, 30(2), pp. 242-53.
Chandler, A., 1962. Strategy and Structure: Chapters in the History of the Industrial Enterprise. Cambridge MA: The M.I.T Press.
Collis, D., and Montgomery, C., 1995, ‘Competing on Resources: Strategy in the 1990’s’, Harvard Business Review, 73(4), July/August, pp.118- 28.
Cullis, J., and Jones, P., 1998. Public Finance and Public Choice. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Dresser, G., 1997. ‘Non-Financial Factors for Investors’, Measuring Business Excellence 1(1), pp. 8-11.
Epstein, M.J., and Wisner, P.S., 2001, ‘Increasing Corporate Accountability: The External Disclosure of Balanced Scorecard Measures’, Balanced Scorecard Report 3(4), July/August, pp.10-13.
Estes, R., 1996, ‘Tyranny of the Bottom Line’, Executive Excellence, 13(10), October, p.12.
Evans, H., Ashworth, G., Gooch, J., and Davies, R., 1996, ‘Who Needs Performance Management’, Management Accounting 74(11), December: 20-25.
Fera, N., 1997, ‘Using Shareholder Value to Evaluate Strategic Choices’, Management Accounting 79 (5), November, pp. 47-51.
Frigo, M.L., 2002, ‘Strategy and the Balanced Scorecard’, Strategic Finance Journal, 84(5), November, pp. 6-9.
Frigo, M.L., 2001, ‘The State of Strategic Performance Measurement: The IMA 2001 Survey, The Balanced Scorecard Report’ 3(6), pp. 13-14.
Goodmam, M., (2001) ‘Implementing the Balanced Scorecard to Drive Your Business Forward’ – Report of Conference Proceedings, Institute of Management Services.
Grant, R., 1991. ‘The Resource Based Theory of Competitive Management: Implications for Strategy Formulation’. California Management Review 33(3): 114-35.
Hall, R., 1992, ‘The Strategic Analysis of Intangible Resources’. Strategic Management Journal, 13(2), pp.35-44.
Hamel, G., 1996, ‘Strategy as a Revolution’, Harvard Business Review’, 74(4), July/August. pp. 69-82.
Hamel, G., and Prahalad, C.K., 1989, ‘Strategic Intent’, Harvard Business Review, May-June, pp. 63-76.
Hamel, G., and Prahalad, C.K., 1993, ‘Strategy as Stretch and Leverage’, Harvard Business Review, Mar/April.
Hamel, G., and Prahalad, C.K., 1996, Competing for the Future. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Press.
Hennel, A., and Warner, A., (1998), Financial Performance Management and Shareholder Value Explained, London, Financial Times Management.
HM Treasury, 2001, Choosing the Right Fabric- A Framework for Performance Information. London: National Audit Office Publications.
Hoffmeister, J., 2001, The Value-Adding Power of External Disclosures, Balanced Scorecard Report 3(5), Sept./ Oct.pp. 10-11.
References
Hopwood, A.G., 1973, Managerial Behaviour, Farnborough, Saxon House.
Jensen, M., 2002, ‘Value Maximization, stakeholder theory, and the corporate objective function’, Business Ethics Quarterly,(12) 2 , April pp. 235-256.
Kakabadse, A., 2001, ‘What is Vision – Sheer Inspiration’, Management Today, London, Haymarket, pp. 4-5.
Kapan, R., and Norton, D., 1993. ‘Putting the Balanced Scorecard to Work’. Harvard Business Review 71(5).
Kaplan, R., 1994. ‘Management Accounting (1984-1994): Development of New Practice and Theory’. Management Accounting Research 5:247-60.
Kaplan, R., and Norton, D., 2004 ‘Strategy Maps’ – Converting Intangible Assets into Tangible Outcomes. Boston MA – Harvard Business School Press.
Kaplan, R., and Norton, D., 1992. ‘The Balanced Scorecard- Measures that Drive Performance’. Harvard Business Review 70(1), January/February: 71-79.
Kaplan, R., and Norton, D.,1996a, The Balanced Scorecard. Boston MA: Harvard Business School Press.
------. 1996b. Using the Balanced Scorecard as a Strategic Management System. Harvard Business Review 74(1), January/February: 75-85.
------. 1996c. Linking the Balanced Scorecard to Strategy. California Management Review 39(1), Fall: 53-79.
------. 1996d. Strategic Learning and the Balanced Scorecard. Strategy and Leadership, September/October.
------. 1996e. Knowing the Score. Financial Executive, November/December.
Kaplan, R., and Lamotte, G., 2001, ‘The Balanced Scorecard and Quality Programs’, Balanced Scorecard Report, 3(2), March/April. pp. 9-11.
Kaplan, R. S., and Norton, D., 2001, The Strategy Focused Organization. Boston: Harvard University Press.
Kurtzman, J., 1997. ‘Is Your Company of Course? Now You Can Find Out Why’. Fortune 135(3), February: 128-30.
Leadbeater, C., 1997. ‘Flying with a Clear View’. Financial Times Management Supplement (April).
Lehn, K., and Makhija, Anil K., 1996, ‘EVA & MVA: As performance measures and signals for strategic change’, Strategy & Leadership, 24 (3), May/June, pp. 34-39.
Letza, S., 1996. ‘The Design and Implementation of the Balanced Scorecard’. Business Process Re-Engineering & Management Journal 2(3): 54-76.
Lingle, J., and Schiemann, W., 1996. ‘From Balanced Scorecard to Strategic Gauges :Is Measurement Worth It’. Management Review 85(3), March: 56-61.
Littler, K., Aisthorpe, P., Hudson, R., and Keasey, K., 2000, ‘A New Approach to Linking Strategy Formulation and Strategy Implementation: An Example From the UK Banking Sector’, International Journal of Information Management, 20, pp. 411-428.
Lucas, M., 1995,‘Efficient Consumer Response in the Grocery Industry’, Working Paper,Department of MSIS, University of Auckland, New Zealand.
McNair, C., Lynch, R.L., and Cross,K.F., 1990, ‘Do Financial and Non Financial Measures Have to Agree’. Management Accounting, November, pp. 28-35.
McWilliams, B., 1996. ‘The Measure of Success’. Across the Board 33(2), February: 16-20.
Mintzberg, H., 1990. ‘Strategic Formation: Schools of Thought’. In Perspectives on Strategic Management. Boston MA: Ballinger.
Moore, M.H., 1995. Creating Public Value – Strategic Management in Government. Cambridge, Massachusetts: Harvard University Press.
Morgan, G., 1997, Images of Organization. Thousand Oaks: Sage Publications.
Newring, R., 1995. ‘Wake Up to the Balanced Scorecard’. Management Accounting 73(3), March: 22-23.
Norton, D., 2001 ‘Building Strategy Maps: The Importance of Time-Phasing the Strategy’, Balanced Scorecard Report, 3(2), March/April, pp.1-4.
Norton, D., 1997, ‘Aligning Strategy and Performance with the Balanced Scorecard’, ACA Journal, 6(3), August, pp.18-27.
------. 2001. ‘Building Strategy Maps: The Importance of Time- Phasing the Strategy’. Balanced Scorecard Report 3(2), March/April: 1-4.
Olve, N.G., Roy, J., and Wetter, M., 1999. Performance Drivers, A Practical Guide to Using the Balanced Scorecard. Chichester: John Wiley & Sons.
Otley, D., 1997. ‘Better Performance Management’. Management Accounting 75(1), January: 44.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard 61
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard62
Palmer, E., Parker, D., 2001 ‘Understanding Performance Measurement Systems Using Physical Science Uncertainty Principles’, International Journal of Operations & Production Management 21(7).
Parker, L.D., 1979 ‘Understanding Performance Measurement Systems: Beyond an Exclusive Profit Test’, Accounting and Business Research, Autumn , pp. 309-319.
Porter, M., 1980, Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analysing Industries and Competitors. New York: Free Press.
------. 1985, Competitive Advantage: Creating and Sustaining Superior Performance. New York: Free Press.
------. 1991. Towards a Dynamic Theory of Strategy. Strategic Management Journal 12(Special), Winter: 95-117.
------, 1996, ‘What is Strategy?’, Harvard Business Review.
Prahalad, C., and Hamel, G., 1990, ‘The Core Competence of the Corporation’, Harvard Business Review, 68(3), May, pp. 79-91.
Ridgway, V.F., 1956, ‘Dysfunctional Consequences of Performance Measurements’, in Accounting Control Systems: A Behavioral and Technical Integration’ ed J.Bell , New York, M.Weiner Publishing Inc.
Rigby, D.K., 2001, ‘Putting Tools to the Test: Senior Executives Rate 25 top Management Tools’, Strategy & Leadership, 29 (3), May/June, pp. 4-12.
Rusk, D., 1997. ‘An Investigation of the Use of the Balanced Scorecard Measurement Systems in the UK Financial Services and an Analysis of the Determinants of Success and Failure in the Operation of Such Systems’. Sheffield Hallam School of Computing and Management Sciences.
Senge, P.M., 1990, ‘The Fifth Discipline – The Art & Practice of the Learning Organisation’, London, Random House.
Simmonds, K., 1981. ‘Strategic Management Accounting’. Management Accounting, April, 26-29.
Simons, R., 1995, ‘Control in Age of Empowerment’. Harvard Business Review 73(2), March/April, pp. 80-88.
Smullen, J., 1997. Balanced Scorecards and Activity Based Management. London: Financial Times: Pitman Publishing.
Spencer, C., and Francis, G., 1998. ‘Divisional Performance Measures: EVA as a Proxy for Shareholder Wealth’. In Performance Measurement and Theory and Practice, vol. 1. Cambridge: Judge Institute of Management Studies.
Stacey, R., 2000, Strategic Management & Organisational Dynamics – The Challenge of Complexity, Financial Times Prentice Hall.
Stalk, G., Evans, P., and Shulman, L., 1992, ‘Competing on Capabilities: The New Rules of Corporate Strategy’, Harvard Business Review, 70(2), March/April, pp. 57-69.
Stewart, G., 1991, The Quest for Value: The EVA Management Guide. New York: Harper Collins.
Stewart, T., 1997, ‘Brain Power: Who Owns It. How They Profit From It’. Fortune, 135(5), March, pp. 65-68.
Vitale, M., Mavrinac, S., and Hauser, M., 1994. ‘The Chemical Division’s Balanced Scorecard’. Planning Review 22(4), August: 17.
Weber, M., 1947, The Theory of Social and Economic Organization. London: Oxford University Press.
Wernerfelt, B., 1984. ‘A Resource Based View of the Firm’. Strategic Management Journal 5(2): 171-80.
Wisniewski, M., Dickson, A., 2001 ‘Measuring Performance in Dumfries and Galloway Constabulary’, Journal of the Operational Research Society, 52 (10), October, pp. 1057-1066.
A Practitioner’s Guide to the Balanced Scorecard 63
CIMA (The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants) represents members and supports the wider financial management
and business community. Its key activities relate to business strategy, information strategy and financial strategy. Its focus is to
qualify students, to support both members and employers and to protect the public interest.
June 2005
The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants 26 Chapter Street London SW1P 4NP United Kingdom
T. +44 (0)20 7663 5441 F. +44 (0)20 8849 2262 E. [email protected] www.cimaglobal.com
ISBN 1-85971-570-2
Emphasis on non financial sucess mesures article.pdf
B ig projects tend to grab all the headlines but the reality for most project managers is that success is measured in a succession of relatively small-scale
projects. What’s more, many project managers work alone, without the support of other project professionals. However, whether large-scale or small-scale, the principles of best practice in project management should always be applied.
In Botswana one project manager is applying the knowledge he gained in studying for the Chartered Management Institute’s Diploma in Programme and Project Management by providing support and information about HIV/AIDS.
Munyaradzi Katumba, 31, studied for the qualification by distance learning with UK-based The Projects Group (TPG). He moved to Botswana from neighbouring Zimbabwe in 2003 and settled in Maun in the Okavango Delta, 1,000km from the capital city of Gaborone.
Initially, he worked for the Coping Centre for People Living with HIV/AIDS and four years ago transferred to the Love Botswana Outreach Mission. He found the course online and contacted several training organisations. TPG were the first to reply. Prospective candidates are usually interviewed face-to-face but, as that wasn’t possible, TPG’s course director Jan Underdown interviewed Munya by phone. She says: “We quickly established that Munya was a suitable candidate for the diploma. It was clear that he would benefit from the qualification because of his role.”
The mission is dedicated to helping the people of the Ngamiland district, where HIV/AIDS is endemic. The situation is so dire that Lieutenant General Seretse Khama Ian Khama, President of the Republic of Botswana, said: “We are facing a situation where every Motswana (Botswana) is either infected or affected; having lost a relative, friend, workmate or an acquaintance to the pandemic [of AIDS].”
Munya’s role is to act as leader, educator and mentor for the youth of Botswana on HIV/AIDS care, support and prevention. It is a varied and challenging role which
35
Putting emphasis on non-financial success measures
professional managernov2008
P R O J E C T M A N A G E M E N T
Cost savings aren’t the only measure of project management success. In the not-
for-profit sector the primary benchmark may be raising awareness of health issues or,
in the field of disability employment, helping more people to find work in mainstream
organisations. Report by Sue Mann
‘All the projects and programmes
I manage are donor driven and
donors can change their
scope at any time’
Munyaradzi Katumba, Love Botswana Outreach Mission
involves going out into the community to schools and villages as well as managing a large team of employees and volunteers.
Lack of resources He is also responsible for ongoing assessment, planning, development, implementation and internal evaluation. There are many challenges – but none more so than the lack of resources to implement projects and programmes.
“All the projects and programmes I manage are donor
driven and donors can change their scope at any time,” he says. “Sometimes donors specify how their resources should be used. This can conflict with organisational, community or cultural norms. It can be frustrating when agreements are not followed but that’s what project management is all about - in any organisation, proper risk and issue management should be executed.”
He undertook the course because he wanted a document that proved his capability to manage projects and programmes. “I had no idea that the course would be so interesting – I had thought that project management would only fit into investment projects with monetary benefits.”
At first he found it difficult to fit an HIV/AIDS project into the management methodologies he was learning. “At one stage I asked Jan my tutor if I could use a case study but she insisted that I use my own project, which I did and it was very rewarding.”
Jan says: “We want all candidates to base the case study on their own workplace, so that they and their organisations get direct benefit from the course. Although it can be challenging at first – especially for candidates working in not-for-profit environments – they soon find the assignments can be applied to their own situations.”
She was impressed with the quality of Munya’s work and says all the assessors who read his final assignment were very affected by it. “We felt extremely moved to be able to share in Munya’s important work and to know what a difference doing the course had made to him and his organisation,” she says.
P R O J E C T M A N A G E M E N T 36
‘These are skills that every
manager should have, whether
relocating their team or building
multimillion pound schemes’"
Richard Sewell CMgr MCMI, head of qualifications, Chartered Management Institute
Sharing knowledge The Love Botswana Outreach Mission was so impressed with Munya’s development that he was promoted. “The organisation felt I had proved my job competence and promoted me from project manager to programme director (portfolio of projects),” Munya says.
He added: “The course is structured in a way that made me apply every little detail into practice as a project manager. I also now have the opportunity to share my knowledge with other staff. It is part of my job to align other projects and programmes to MSP (Managing Successful Programmes) and PRINCE2. I have really enjoyed being able to teach and supervise staff on the implementation of the two best practice methods.”
The mission operates as the secretariat for a council of NGOs (Non-Governmental Organsations) in the Ngamiland district and has a membership of more than 20 NGOs. Munya was appointed by the council board to be the project manager for a capacity building project.
“I had the opportunity to develop a project initiation document, work breakdown structure and a budget which was required by the national umbrella board for approval of funding. The project got funded and when the umbrella board informed me of the approval they acknowledged the quality of my work. My documents were then demonstrated as best practice at a workshop attended by many organisations,” Munya says.
He is also acting as a mentor for the district and one of his responsibilities is to mentor other organisations working on health-related projects.
He sees the diploma as a stepping stone to attaining the Institute’s Chartered Manager designation and possibly continuing his studies by undertaking an MSc in Project Management.
Adrian Dooley, managing director of TPG, the training organisation that worked with Munya says: “All too often the emphasis of training programmes is on exam passes rather than whether someone can learn to do a better job in delivering projects in their own sphere of expertise. TPG is privileged to have supported Munya through his diploma and I hope he goes on to greater things. Everyone at TPG is proud that we have, in some small way, made a difference.”
Organisational change Closer to home, CITI Limited has been involved in a change programme at Remploy which will enable many more people with disabilities to work in mainstream employment.
Remploy was set up 60 years ago to provide employment for disabled people, establishing factories throughout the UK but, as Remploy’s chief executive Bob Warner explains: “There is now an acceptance that disabled people would prefer to work in mainstream employment alongside non-disabled people rather than in sheltered workshops from which they do not progress and develop. Therefore the company had to change.
“The vision was clear and the change made complete sense. It was a great day for Remploy when we were successful in securing government approval for our
37
modernisation plan. It meant that we could increase the number of disabled people supported into work from around 5,000 a year currently to 20,000 a year by 2012. And we pledged that we would do it without compulsory redundancy of any disabled employee.”
CITI was appointed to advise on how to manage the change programme and help bring it about. The project involved closing or merging 28 factories and transferring people and production within a limited time and a defined budget. Bob Warner said that the company had never executed a programme of this scale and complexity and they had to do it under the media spotlight, working in a highly charged atmosphere where emotions, understandably, were running high.
An early decision was made that, rather than bringing in external project managers, CITI would train and develop Remploy staff as project and change managers and would provide appropriate systems and support to allow Remploy personnel to undertake this major change programme for themselves.
Over the 12 months to the end of March 2008, Remploy has found 6,600 jobs in mainstream employment for people with disabilities – an increase of 27 per cent on the previous year. The figures include 4,600 jobs under the government’s Workstep programme, aimed at those who experience the greatest barriers to finding and keeping a job – a rise of 47 per cent on the previous year. The factories were closed on time, the work transferred successfully and there were no compulsory redundancies of disabled employees, say CITI.
Richard Sewell CMgr MCMI, head of qualifications at the Chartered Management Institute, says: “Both these examples show how programme and project management skills can be applied in any sphere.
“These are skills that every manager should have, whether the most challenging task they will be given is on a par with relocating their team to another building or playing a part in building multimillion pound schemes.”
P R O J E C T M A N A G E M E N T 38
As more and more companies seek
confirmation that individuals have a
broad range of key professional skills in
both project management and managing
change, the Introductory Certificate in
Project Management - awarded by the
Association of Project Management
and Certificate in Change Management -
validated and certified by both Edexcel
and SQA, will provide recognition of your
professional skills and identify you as a
qualified practitioner. These qualifications
will also add prestige to your CV,
enhancing your career potential and
build strength and capability within
your organisation.
For further details please call
01293 568817 or visit us at
www.techniquesforchange.co.uk
Introductory Certificate in Project Management
Certificate in Change Management
P R
O JE
C T
M A
N A
G E
M E
N T
D IR
E C
T O
R Y
Techniques for Change Our mission is to help clients achieve
optimum performance. The current
economic climate means organisations
need to motivate staff so they achieve
maximum productivity. Although pay
rises are the obvious answer, higher
salaries may not be an option – and in
any case this kind of motivation doesn’t
guarantee higher productivity.
Feedback from our clients shows that
after a relevant and worthwhile training
course, employees feel inspired,
re-energised and valued, armed with
new knowledge and understanding
which they can apply to their job.
Even though the uncertain economic
climate looks like it’s going to be with us
for a while, we can take measures to
ensure employees feel motivated and
secure. When the economy turns round,
organisations that follow this strategy
will have faired better during the
downturn, and will be better placed to
seize the opportunities that arise as
confidence returns to the market.
Visit www.maventraining.co.uk or call
020 7403 7100.
Maven Training Limited
Projects and programmes are the most
efficient vehicles to manage change;
assuming of course their link to
organisational strategy is clear, the right
capability is in place to manage them
and the right process environment exists
to optimise the delivery.
Through a client focused partnership,
we bring pragmatic solutions to strategy
execution, people development, process
optimisation and provide top industry
professionals for project and programme
delivery and assurance.
CITI is proud to have been successfully
supporting Europe’s leading organisations
meet these challenges for nearly 20
years.
Visit our website www.citi.co.uk or call us
on 01908 283600 to see how we can
help you.
CITI Association for Project Management
Further Information Chartered Management Institute www.managers.org.uk/ qualifications, call 01536 207453 or e-mail qualifications@ managers.org.uk
The APM Group - www.apmgroup.co.uk
The Projects Group (TPG) - www.tpgacademy.com
Remploy – www.remploy.co.uk
CITI Limited – www.citi.co.uk
Workstep - www.direct.gov.uk/en/ DisabledPeople /Employmentsupport/
‘All too often the
emphasis of training
programmes is on exam
passes rather than
whether someone can
learn to do a better job’
Adrian Dooley, managing director,
The Projects Group (TPG)
pm
APM are the leading professional body
for project professionals in the UK. The
APM Body of Knowledge 5th edition
defines the 52 knowledge areas required
to manage any project regardless of size
or type. APM members are project
management professionals who can
tailor their skills to deliver success in
any project environment. The
association has over 16,500 members
and its four-stage qualifications scheme
is designed to support project
professionals throughout their careers.
Other services include publications,
events, regional branches and Specific
Interest Groups. Through its programme
Chartered & BEYOND, APM is currently
in the process of applying for a Royal
Charter.
Association for Project Management,
150 West Wycombe Road,
High Wycombe, Bucks HP12 3AE.
Tel: 0845 458 1944
Fax: 01494 528 937
Email: [email protected]
Website: www.apm.org.uk
HR Teams Rank Low in Analytical Skills 3.2.pdf
Executive Briefing
By Dori Meinert
Concealing Identity Has an Economic Impact Being forced to hide personal information, such as sexual orientation, can be emotionally stressful. However, researchers also have found that it can nega- tively affect employees' productivity and interactions with co-workers.
For employees, the strain of constantly monitoring what they say takes its toll on their work, says Clayton R. Critcher, assistant professor at the Univer- sity of California at Berkeley's Haas School of Business.
The research adds an economic perspective to what has been primarily a moral debate over the treatment of gays and lesbians in the workplace, he says.
"Employees perform best when they feel comfortable being open about themselves and their identities at work," says Critcher, who conducted the study with Melissa J. Ferguson, associate psychology professor at Cornell University.
They conducted three studies in which some participants were instructed not to reveal their sexual orientation during mock interviews. In the fourth study, the researchers measured whether the participants' intellectual, physi- cal and interpersonal skills were degraded by concealment. In one study, the participants who concealed their sexual orientation performed 17 percent worse on a military spatial intelligence test than those who went through the interview without instructions to conceal. In another experiment, partici- pants told to hide their sexual orientation exhibited 20 percent less physical stamina. In other tests, participants responded with more anger to a snippy e-mail from a superior and demonstrated poorer performance in executive cognitive functioning.
"Given that people's sexual identities will inevitably enter into workplace dynamics, sexual orientation should not be treated as a possibly taboo secret but as a type of acceptable and welcome diversity," Critcher says. "If these norms can be made explicit early, such as in job applications or the ititerview process, gay and lesbian prospects can proceed openly and honestly in a way that will allow them to perform to their potential."
The study, "The Cost of Keeping It Hidden: Decomposing Concealment Reveals What Makes It Depleting," was published online in June 2013 prior to publication in the Journal of Experimental Psychology: General.
HR Teams Rank Low In Analytical Skills HR departments around the world are viewed as having lower analytical skills than other departments, leaving them ill-prepared for the era of "big data," concludes a study by the American Management Association (AMA) released in October 2013.
In a survey of 789 business professionals in more than 40 countries, only 27 percent ranked their HR staff as being "experts" or "advanced." In contrast, 58 percent gave finance departments the highest rankings, while 51 percent placed executive teams in the top categories.
Half of the surveyed business profession- als—they were largely managers and direc- tors—believe that HR professionals have only a "basic" ability. (HR professionals made up the largest subgroup of survey respondents—18 percent.)
"Professionals at all levels have to know what questions to ask and how to make wise choices based on data," says Robert G. Smith, AMA senior vice president.
The survey shows that analytical skills will become even more important in the next five years, requiring companies to ramp up training and development to hone those skills. A lack of resources and corporate culture are the biggest roadblocks preventing organizations from fully leveraging big data, the study found.
"It used to be OK that only a handful of experts in a company had analytical responsi- bilities, but no longer," he says. "Every function must have the right people with the right skills."
The study, "Conquering Big Data: A Study of Analytical Skills in the Workplace," was conducted for the AMA by the Institute for Corporate Productivity.
For examples of how HR departments are using big data, read HR Magazine's October 2013 cover story, "The Benefits of Big Data," at www.shrm.org/1013-big-data.
13% of employees worldwide are engaged at work.
oiirce: Gailup Inc.'s Slate of ihe Workplace s inducted 2011-2012
14 HR Magazine December 2013
Copyright of HR Magazine is the property of Society for Human Resource Management and its content may not be copied or emailed to multiple sites or posted to a listserv without the copyright holder's express written permission. However, users may print, download, or email articles for individual use.
LO3 Lesson slides 9.12.21 with voice notes.pptx
LO3 Measuring the impact and value of people practice to the organisation
Tonight
Compare and contrast financial and non financial measures used by organisations
Idenitfy systems and data used by people practitioners to provide insights into measuring work and people performance
Candidates should assess 3 different sources of business data (internal or external, qualitative or quantitative) and provide examples of how each is (or could) be used by HR for planning purposes. Examples might include: HR metrics such as HR costs, business metrics such as productivity etc, industry information e.g. trends in HR, competitive information, government information.
Assessing and using data:
sources of data and business information including HR Metrics
Handling, analysing and reviewing complex business data
interpreting trends, patterns and metrics in the organisation, and identifying obstacles and risks, Responding to change, short term imperatives and long term horizons
Preparing position and policy papers
Communicating with senior, middle managers and staff
Data that is captured and stored by a business as a digital asset that may support strategy, decision making and operations
Business data is information that is used to plan and operate an organization. This includes source data that a business collects anddata that has been processed such as calculated metrics and forecasts.Business data can be stored in databases that are machine-readable or represented as information intended for human consumption such as a user interface, document or report. The following are common types of business data.
Dark Data is data that an organization collects but doesn't use
Metadata is data that describes other data. This can include both information about data structures and individual records or files. In some cases, metadata is embedded in a file itself. For example, a digital photograph may include information about camera settings, copyright, scene, location and time. In other cases, metadata is contained in an external repository such as the information that search engines collect by using robots to discover and crawl web content.
Product Catalog is an authoritative source of product data for an organization. It may include a product name, description, specificationsand relationships to other products such as members of a product line.
Reference Data is data that is used to structure and constrain other data. It is typically stable information with a known set of values that rarely change.
Transactional Data is information that documents an exchange, agreement or transfer that occurs between organizations and/or individuals. It is a special category of data as transactions typically have commercial and legal significance. E.g purchases, returns, debits, interest, lending payroll, etc
Source: https://simplicable.com/new/business-data
1
Traditional organisational financial and non financial measurements
For business performance, traditional analytics would include data / data trends around:
Gross and net profit
Return On investment.
Cash flow
Other measures include:
Balance scorecard
Key Performance Indicators
Productivity
Service Level Agreement
Financial performance measurement usually concentrate attention on the short-term success factors of a business. ... Whereas, non-financial performance measurement indicates deficiencies in those areas of business that can affect the long-term strategic success of an organization.
2
Gross and net profit
GROSS is to describe the total amount of something.
NET is used to describe the amount that is left after all the necessary deductions have been made
e.g Profit per employee, also referred to as net income per employee (NIPE), is a metric that you can use to calculate your business's net income divided by the total number of employees. Put simply, it tells you how much profit each of your employees brings in over the course of a given period
3
when you are talking about gross profit, you are talking about the difference between revenue and the cost of making the product.
When you are subtracting interest payments, taxation, and selling, administrative, general, and all the other expenses, gross profit becomes net profit, and it obviously is lower.
In other words, net profit is the amount of money that remains in the company after it has paid all of its expenses and there is no way that it will get any lower than it already is.
3
Return On investment.
Return on investment (ROI) is a metric used to understand the profitability of an investment. ROI compares how much you paid for an investment to how much you earned to evaluate its efficiency.
How would you
calculate ROI on
human capital?
4
e.g To calculate ROI by the human capital formula, divide the organization's net revenue – gross revenue after deducting operating expenses, salaries and benefits – by the cost of salaries and benefits, reports HRMS World.
In layman terms, it is the amount of profit obtained by a company against every pound invested in their human capital compensation. ... Human Capital ROI shows the financial value individually or collectively contributed by your employees. Basically, it provides a true measure of the productivity of human resources.
4
Cash flow
Cash flow is often referred to as the lifeblood of an organisation.
With it, operations can proceed smoothly, allowing the best decisions possible to be made and without concerns about the company's ability to pay its bills.
Without it, decisions are often hampered by an inability to pay and thus a company can end up implementing a plan or taking a course of action that is not in its best long-term interests.
Controlling cash flow means that you know where your cash is tied up, you will be able to spot potential bottlenecks and act to reduce their impact, and you will be able to reduce your dependence on bankers, resulting in savings on interest charges.
Most importantly, you will have better control of your business and will therefore be able to make informed decisions.
5
It is important for cash to flow effectively through the business system, as illustrated in the diagram below. Too little cash, or indeed any other factors impeding a smooth and continuous flow of cash, creates problems. Without an adequate flow of cash, a company may be trading profitably in the shorter term, but may nevertheless collapse. Poor management of cash flow is said to be the most common reason for the failure of small firms.
Managers should avoid:
assuming that all sales are equal
disregarding the role of the customer service department in enhancing cash flow
failing to assess credit risks carefully.
Picture illustrates the flow of cash through a business.
The flow starts at (1) when the would-be owners of the business (or shareholder(s) if it is to be a limited company) invest funds, which go into the pool of cash (2).
This investment may not be a once and for all step. There may be subsequent investments for a variety of reasons, some of which could well be positive - for example, business expansion. Other reasons for investment might be negative - a shortage of liquid funds, for example. At the same time, or again later, lenders (3) may also put funds into the cash pool. The lenders may be the firm's bankers or, in some cases, members of the family or friends of the business owners.
To enable the firm to start trading we will assume that it obtains goods and services (4) on credit from suppliers (5) who become creditors. Consideration will also be given to obtaining fixed assets (6). These may range from freehold buildings to office equipment. You will recognise that if acquisition is based on purchase, and if relevant assets are truly fixed, some liquid capital has been immobilised immediately. Cash also flows out of the 'pool' in the form of salaries and wages (7) and other expenses (8), which may include, for example, stationery and computer software.
If the new firm is to manufacture goods, it will need to procure raw materials (9) - another outflow of cash (sooner, if the materials are paid for immediately, and not very much later if they are purchased on credit). Expenditure on wages and other expenses, together with the use of raw materials, will lead to the creation of stocks of saleable products (10).
If the firm does not manufacture products for sale, it will purchase saleable stocks for resale. The stocks will join 'the stream' on their sale and will probably be sold on credit to customers who become debtors (11). They will owe the firm the price of goods or services supplied until they pay. When they do pay, cash will continue to flow back into the cash pool (2).
Yet the cycle is still not complete. At the appropriate time, cash will be moved from the pool to pay taxes (12), to make payments to creditors (13), to make repayments of capital and payments of interest to lenders (14) and to make payments of dividends or other forms of reward to the owners, the original investors (15). The flow of cash through the business is never ending. If there is a blockage at any point, e.g. if sufficient money to purchase raw materials is unavailable - it may be difficult for the company to continue operating, even when the business is healthy in every other regard. Without an injection of cash, trading will cease and the firm will be wound up.
5
A measurement of the efficiency of production, taking the form of a ratio of the output of goods, and services, to the input of factors of production.
Average productivity is the ratio of total output of a process to total inputs;
labour productivity takes account of inputs of employee hours worked;
capital productivity takes account of inputs of machines or land;
and marginal productivity measures the additional output gained from an additional unit of input.
Techniques to improve productivity include a greater use of new technology, altered working practices and improved training of the workforce.
6
CIPD https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/work/productivity#gref
CMI blog...Productivity – are we measuring it correctly? print article
Productivity at work means achieving effective results in as short amount of time as possible, leaving you with more time to enjoy freely. ... Productivity is best achieved when looking at your current way of working, identifying the bottlenecks, flaws, and hindrances, and then finding ways to improve
Organisational Productivity is the capacity of an organisation, institution, or business to produce desired results with a minimum expenditure of energy, time, money, personnel, materiel, etc.
6
The balanced scorecard
The balanced scorecard is a strategic performance management tool that can be used by managers to monitor how business activities are contributing to the organisation’s overall strategy. The Balanced.
7
The balanced scorecard is a strategic performance management tool that can be used by managers to monitor how business activities are contributing to the organisation’s overall strategy. The Balanced Scorecard adds strategic non-financial performance measures to traditional financial metrics to give a more balanced view of organisational performance. Devised by Robert S. Kaplan and David P. Norton in 1992, the balanced scorecard changed conventional thinking about performance metrics. The model has evolved from a simple performance measurement framework to a full strategic planning and management system. It provides a framework of performance measurements and also assists to identify what should be done and measured.
The balanced scorecard takes into account not only the traditional ‘hard' financial measures but three additional categories of ‘soft' quantifiable operational measures
financial perspective - timely and accurate financial data continues to be essential
customer perspective - how an organisation is perceived by its customers
internal perspective - issues in which an organisation must excel through business process improvements
innovation, learning and growth perspective - supported by knowledge management activities and initiatives, areas in which an organisation must improve and add value to its products, services, or operations.
Measurements taken across these four categories are seen to provide a rounded Balanced Scorecard that reflects organisation performance more accurately than one based solely on financial indicators. This in turn assists managers to focus on their mission, rather than merely on short-term financial gain. It also helps to motivate staff to achieve strategic objectives.
How it can help
When used as a strategic planning and management tool, this model can help align an organisation behind a shared vision of success, and get people working on the right things and focusing on results. The value of a scorecard system comes from the continuous selfinquiry and in-depth process of discovery and analysis that is at the heart of the process. The approach has most value if you start with the understanding that you are in it for the long term, and that you will learn a lot about how your organisation needs to work to satisfy customers, stakeholders and employees.
7
Service Level Agreement
A service level agreement (SLA) is an agreement between a service provider and a customer which specifies the level of service to be delivered.
A service level agreement (SLA) focuses on services, technical information and service standards. It is the result of a process of negotiation which recognises needs and constraints on both sides.
A SLA is usually part of a wider 'framework agreement' which is often referred to as the services contract or the outsourcing contract.
The agreement can be an informal contract between two parties or a legally binding contract. The legal terms, if any, are included in the framework agreement.
A SLA is also a tool to gauge performance, but it is different than a KPI. It's an agreement that's between an internal or external service provider and the entity that is the end-user of that service.
8
Template downloaded from CMI if anyone interested.
To be fully understood and used by both parties, a service level agreement should be clearly written and well structured. Those in the organisation who have a thorough understanding of current services, standards and costs should be involved in preparing the SLA to ensure that any new arrangements are as good or better than before.
SLAs (service level agreements) are notoriously difficult to measure, report on, and meet. They can also be difficult to configure and change in many service desks. Still, it’s important to track your performance against top objectives, and SLAs provide a great opportunity to improve customer satisfaction.
Check out metrics used to measure SLA https://www.businesstechweekly.com/operational-efficiency/outsourcing-and-supplier-management/measure-sla-metrics/
8
Financial and non financial tools for measuring business performance
Compare and contrast the following:
Key Performance Indicators
Productivity
Service Level Agreement
Cash flow
ROI
Gross and net profit
Can you find any others – what does your organisation use?
45 minutes RESEARCH ACTIVITY
Compare and contrast = Comparing and contrasting means looking for similarities and differences between two things, which you can see nicely in a Venn diagram
Organisations, whether commercial or not-for-profit, have long been obsessed with managing and measuring performance and there is little sign of this easing up.
Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) are the critical (key) indicators of progress toward an intended result. KPIs provides a focus for strategic and operational improvement, create an analytical basis for decision making and help focus attention on what matters most. As Peter Drucker famously said, “What gets measured gets done.”
Human Resources key performance indicators (HR KPIs) are metrics that are used to see how HR is contributing to the rest of the organization. ... In other words, HR KPIs mirror organizational performance for HR, as they are defined based on theHR outcomes that are relevant to achieve business goals Managing with the use of KPIs includes setting targets (the desired level of performance) and tracking progress against that target. Managing with KPIs often means working to improve leading indicators that will later drive lagging benefits. Leading indicators are precursors of future success; lagging indicators show how successful the organization was at achieving results in the past.
What exactly are KPIs? https://www.bernardmarr.com/default.asp?contentID=762
In simple terms, KPIs provide a way to measure how well companies, business units, projects or individuals are performing in relation to their strategic goals and objectives.
In their broadest sense, KPIs provide the most important performance information that enables organisations (or their stakeholders) to understand whether or not the organisation is on track toward its stated objectives. In this way, well-designed KPIs are vital navigational instruments, giving a clear picture of current levels of performance and whether the business is where it needs to be.
KPIs are also useful decision-making tools. Because they help reduce the complex nature of organisational performance to a small, manageable number of key indicators, KPIs can, in turn, assist decision making – and, ultimately, help improve performance.
Balance Score Card ; https://hbr.org/video/3633937148001/the-explainer-the-balanced-scorecard
https://balancedscorecards.com/balanced-scorecard/
The Balanced Scorecard is a management system. It’s a way of looking at your organization that focuses on your big-picture strategic goals. It also helps you choose the right things to measure so that you can reach those goals.
Traditionally, companies have judged their health by how much money they make. Financial measures are definitely important, but they only give you part of the picture. They focus on the short-term, and you’re trying to build an organization to stand the test of time. The name “balanced scorecard” comes from the idea of looking at strategic measures in addition to traditional financial measures to get a more “balanced” view of performance.
It’s this focus on both high-level strategy and low-level measures that sets the balanced scorecard apart from other performance management methodologies. It takes your big, fuzzy strategic vision and breaks it down into specific, actionable steps to take on a day-to-day basis.
Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)
Service Level Agreement (SLA)
Productivity
Balanced Scorecard
Legal compliance
Sector ratings
Environmental standards as applicable
Articles
https://bia.ca/measuring-your-organizations-performance/
http://www.cimaglobal.com/Documents/ImportedDocuments/9_Performance_Measurement.pdf
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/strategy/analytics
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/strategy/analytics/people-data-driving-performance
9
BREAKTIME
Be back at 7.05pm
10
Why is HR poor at ‘analytics’?
Angrave et al (2016) argue it is lack of awareness of:
HR professionals understanding how human capital contributes to organisational success. Creating, capturing, leveraging & protecting value = a company-specific strategy.
‘Analytics’ needs to be understood re the data and its context.
Need to identify key ‘talent segments’ of those groups of employees that make the most strategic difference to the business / its performance.
Use of data driven decision –making using empirical analysis and statistical / econometric techniques
11
Barriers to HR successfully using analytics
Many HR professionals sceptical – people cannot be reduced to ‘numbers’
HR function lacks skills / insights / knowledge to ask the right questions of the data they have at their disposal
Relatively peripheral position of HR within the organisational hierarchy
Insufficient data
Silo mentalities within a firm
Angrave et al argue for an ‘integrated talent management suite’ (newest HRIS software)
12
The debate
Argument = ‘analytics’ are important to business success but:
either HR is not very good at this or
the ‘wrong’ analytics are being focussed on by HR & a combination of these two issues means
HR is not taken seriously by the top management of the firm
Complexities..
Are we talking separately about HR ‘metrics’; business ‘metrics’ or how they should be linked to create / sustain a high performing / competitive organisation???
13
CIPD Resources
3.2
Systems and data used by people practitioners to provide insights into measuring work and people performance
15
3.2
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/strategy/analytics#gref
https://peopleprofession.cipd.org/insights/articles/data-people-profession#gref
15
Data measures/systems related to people
Quantative data
Qualitative data
Use of charts, graphs, reports etc
Activity: discuss what people performance data/calculations is used in your organisation and review how these help give insights into people performance and do they add value?
16
As a resource access guide: https://www.cipd.co.uk/Images/peope-analytics-guide_tcm18-51569.pdf
16
Data measures/systems specifically related to organisation
Such as:
Reward
Recruitment
Compliance
Financial
L & D
HR & LMS systems
Activity: in small groups investigate how these help give insights into organisational performance?
17
This Photo by Unknown author is licensed under CC BY-SA-NC.
As a resource access guide: https://www.cipd.co.uk/Images/peope-analytics-guide_tcm18-51569.pdf
17
HR / Business Data could include:
Illness and injury rates
Training completion rate
Employee engagement scores
Employee productivity/performance rates
Team/function-level productivity performance rates
Investment in learning and development (for example cost per head of training)
Revenue/employee (for example revenue per contracted employee or revenue per part-time employee)
Return on investment of the workforce
Employee pay and benefits
Employee–CEO pay gap ratio (for example calculate from pay rates across seniority)
Gender pay gap ratio (for example calculated from pay rates per gender)
Employee turnover rates (for example number of employees who leave per month)
Employee intention to leave
High potential’ turnover rates (for example number of high-performing workers who leave per month)
Succession plan data
Diversity and equality: Career development and progression for minority groups Gender equality in leadership
Talent management: Workforce planning Skills shortages
Employee relations: Industrial action Employee participation in decision making
Things to consider:
Measure the right things
Ask the right question to stakeholders
Discover the context of your data set
18
Measure the right things
You can't optimize what you don't measure. There is not a one-size-fits-all solution. Every business is different and should be treated in a unique way.
Ask the right questions to stakeholders
Go the extra mile to answer all of your stakeholderís questions. This means tapping into the stakeholderís aspirations and challenges by asking the right questions.
It's a must to formulate a clear business question before you start your next data analysis. You can easily waste hours of your time by getting lost in your data. And coming up with "insights" that are already known or not deemed important can be highly frustrating as well!
Discover the context of your data set
Everyone has got data and their own personal data-driven insight (opinion). In most cases, a superior understanding of context leads to the best decisions.
Make sure to establish context for the data you are seeing. What do these numbers mean? Are they important? Does it really affect the business? And how is the data collected?
Data without context isn't that meaningful and can actually lead to bad business decisions because of interpreting it in the wrong way!
18
CIPD resources
19
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/strategy/analytics/factsheet
People analytics can be applied to virtually any aspect of HR activity. For example:
Enhancing employee morale: instead of absorbing the costs of losing key employees, organisations can mitigate against increased attrition rates by measuring the happiness and well-being of their employees and adapting their offer to employees accordingly. Career-development planning, and learning and development for high performers are both ways in which HR departments can use HR data to help improve the morale of the workforce.
Improving retention: An organisation which is suffering from high turnover of key employee groups can use people analytics to anticipate areas with specific issues and can then tailor their incentives to curb attrition accordingly. Better measuring the impact of HR activity on turnover can illustrate the specific needs of certain employee groups, for example adapting incentives for senior leaders to meet their needs if they have specific requirements to keep them from leaving.
More case studies of people analytics in action can be found on our Valuing your Talent web pages and in our research report Human capital analytics and reporting: theory and evidence.
Find out more about how HR and finance professionals are using people data in our report People analytics: driving business performance with people data developed in association with Workday, as well as the international summary reports People analytics: international perspectives.
19
Activity: using this resource to explain how HR might use data to support business planning
20
What does figure 1 tell you about the scope of people analytics?
How can you add value through your data according to figure 2
How is HR people analytics adding value according section 3 and figure 4
Have a look at the KPI example on page 10, and page 11 consider whether these are critical questions that matter in your organisation?
Killer Metrics on page 13, 14 16 & 18 do you recognises these metrics drivers in your organisation and if so how do HR support?
Look at the illustration of the stages of good practice on page 19 -20
Why is evidence important see page 21 & figure 7 on page 22 , how does your organisation compare?
What data failures can you recognise, if any in your organisations practice from looking at figure 8 on page 23
Have a look at the core skills required by HR practitioners in section 6 pages 24-28, are there any areas you would consider developing?
Article
21
https://www.linkedin.com/pulse/breaking-down-3-barriers-implementing-people-analytics-peter-clark
21
Case study
22
People Analytics Case Study: How HR made customers happy https://www.analyticsinhr.com/blog/people-analytics-case-study-how-hr-made-customers-happy/
22
CIPD Resources: Case study
23
CIPD Resources
24
CIPD resources
25
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/strategy/analytics/factsheet
People analytics can be applied to virtually any aspect of HR activity. For example:
Enhancing employee morale: instead of absorbing the costs of losing key employees, organisations can mitigate against increased attrition rates by measuring the happiness and well-being of their employees and adapting their offer to employees accordingly. Career-development planning, and learning and development for high performers are both ways in which HR departments can use HR data to help improve the morale of the workforce.
Improving retention: An organisation which is suffering from high turnover of key employee groups can use people analytics to anticipate areas with specific issues and can then tailor their incentives to curb attrition accordingly. Better measuring the impact of HR activity on turnover can illustrate the specific needs of certain employee groups, for example adapting incentives for senior leaders to meet their needs if they have specific requirements to keep them from leaving.
More case studies of people analytics in action can be found on our Valuing your Talent web pages and in our research report Human capital analytics and reporting: theory and evidence.
Find out more about how HR and finance professionals are using people data in our report People analytics: driving business performance with people data developed in association with Workday, as well as the international summary reports People analytics: international perspectives.
25
CIPD resources
26
(Some) of the writers…
American Management Association (2013) Conquering big data: A study of analytical skills in the workplace. New York: AMA. (global study)
Angrave et al (2016) HR & analytics: Why hr is set to fail the big data challenge. Human Resource Management Journal, 26(1) 1-11.
Heiss, X. (2015) Shared metrics & co-operation between hr & finance to add business value. London: CIPD. (CFO Xerox)
McCarthy, L. (2015) The value wall . London: CIPD.(Group HR Director, SIG)
Roberts, B. (2013) The benefits of big data. HR Magazine, October, 21- 31.
27
https://www.cipd.co.uk/news-views/news-articles/people-analytics-business-performance
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/strategy/analytics
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/strategy/analytics/people-data-driving-performance
27
Next week workshop looking at Task 2 Data analysis and review
28
28
LO3 Lesson slides 9.12.21.pptx
LO3 Measuring the impact and value of people practice to the organisation
Tonight
Compare and contrast financial and non financial measures used by organisations
Idenitfy systems and data used by people practitioners to provide insights into measuring work and people performance
Candidates should assess 3 different sources of business data (internal or external, qualitative or quantitative) and provide examples of how each is (or could) be used by HR for planning purposes. Examples might include: HR metrics such as HR costs, business metrics such as productivity etc, industry information e.g. trends in HR, competitive information, government information.
Assessing and using data:
sources of data and business information including HR Metrics
Handling, analysing and reviewing complex business data
interpreting trends, patterns and metrics in the organisation, and identifying obstacles and risks, Responding to change, short term imperatives and long term horizons
Preparing position and policy papers
Communicating with senior, middle managers and staff
Data that is captured and stored by a business as a digital asset that may support strategy, decision making and operations
Business data is information that is used to plan and operate an organization. This includes source data that a business collects anddata that has been processed such as calculated metrics and forecasts.Business data can be stored in databases that are machine-readable or represented as information intended for human consumption such as a user interface, document or report. The following are common types of business data.
Dark Data is data that an organization collects but doesn't use
Metadata is data that describes other data. This can include both information about data structures and individual records or files. In some cases, metadata is embedded in a file itself. For example, a digital photograph may include information about camera settings, copyright, scene, location and time. In other cases, metadata is contained in an external repository such as the information that search engines collect by using robots to discover and crawl web content.
Product Catalog is an authoritative source of product data for an organization. It may include a product name, description, specificationsand relationships to other products such as members of a product line.
Reference Data is data that is used to structure and constrain other data. It is typically stable information with a known set of values that rarely change.
Transactional Data is information that documents an exchange, agreement or transfer that occurs between organizations and/or individuals. It is a special category of data as transactions typically have commercial and legal significance. E.g purchases, returns, debits, interest, lending payroll, etc
Source: https://simplicable.com/new/business-data
1
Traditional organisational financial and non financial measurements
For business performance, traditional analytics would include data / data trends around:
Gross and net profit
Return On investment.
Cash flow
Other measures include:
Balance scorecard
Key Performance Indicators
Productivity
Service Level Agreement
2
Gross and net profit
GROSS is to describe the total amount of something.
NET is used to describe the amount that is left after all the necessary deductions have been made
e.g Profit per employee, also referred to as net income per employee (NIPE), is a metric that you can use to calculate your business's net income divided by the total number of employees. Put simply, it tells you how much profit each of your employees brings in over the course of a given period
3
when you are talking about gross profit, you are talking about the difference between revenue and the cost of making the product.
When you are subtracting interest payments, taxation, and selling, administrative, general, and all the other expenses, gross profit becomes net profit, and it obviously is lower.
In other words, net profit is the amount of money that remains in the company after it has paid all of its expenses and there is no way that it will get any lower than it already is.
3
Return On investment.
Return on investment (ROI) is a metric used to understand the profitability of an investment. ROI compares how much you paid for an investment to how much you earned to evaluate its efficiency.
How would you
calculate ROI on
human capital?
4
e.g To calculate ROI by the human capital formula, divide the organization's net revenue – gross revenue after deducting operating expenses, salaries and benefits – by the cost of salaries and benefits, reports HRMS World.
In layman terms, it is the amount of profit obtained by a company against every pound invested in their human capital compensation. ... Human Capital ROI shows the financial value individually or collectively contributed by your employees. Basically, it provides a true measure of the productivity of human resources.
4
Cash flow
Cash flow is often referred to as the lifeblood of an organisation.
With it, operations can proceed smoothly, allowing the best decisions possible to be made and without concerns about the company's ability to pay its bills.
Without it, decisions are often hampered by an inability to pay and thus a company can end up implementing a plan or taking a course of action that is not in its best long-term interests.
Controlling cash flow means that you know where your cash is tied up, you will be able to spot potential bottlenecks and act to reduce their impact, and you will be able to reduce your dependence on bankers, resulting in savings on interest charges.
Most importantly, you will have better control of your business and will therefore be able to make informed decisions.
5
It is important for cash to flow effectively through the business system, as illustrated in the diagram below. Too little cash, or indeed any other factors impeding a smooth and continuous flow of cash, creates problems. Without an adequate flow of cash, a company may be trading profitably in the shorter term, but may nevertheless collapse. Poor management of cash flow is said to be the most common reason for the failure of small firms.
Managers should avoid:
assuming that all sales are equal
disregarding the role of the customer service department in enhancing cash flow
failing to assess credit risks carefully.
Picture illustrates the flow of cash through a business.
The flow starts at (1) when the would-be owners of the business (or shareholder(s) if it is to be a limited company) invest funds, which go into the pool of cash (2).
This investment may not be a once and for all step. There may be subsequent investments for a variety of reasons, some of which could well be positive - for example, business expansion. Other reasons for investment might be negative - a shortage of liquid funds, for example. At the same time, or again later, lenders (3) may also put funds into the cash pool. The lenders may be the firm's bankers or, in some cases, members of the family or friends of the business owners.
To enable the firm to start trading we will assume that it obtains goods and services (4) on credit from suppliers (5) who become creditors. Consideration will also be given to obtaining fixed assets (6). These may range from freehold buildings to office equipment. You will recognise that if acquisition is based on purchase, and if relevant assets are truly fixed, some liquid capital has been immobilised immediately. Cash also flows out of the 'pool' in the form of salaries and wages (7) and other expenses (8), which may include, for example, stationery and computer software.
If the new firm is to manufacture goods, it will need to procure raw materials (9) - another outflow of cash (sooner, if the materials are paid for immediately, and not very much later if they are purchased on credit). Expenditure on wages and other expenses, together with the use of raw materials, will lead to the creation of stocks of saleable products (10).
If the firm does not manufacture products for sale, it will purchase saleable stocks for resale. The stocks will join 'the stream' on their sale and will probably be sold on credit to customers who become debtors (11). They will owe the firm the price of goods or services supplied until they pay. When they do pay, cash will continue to flow back into the cash pool (2).
Yet the cycle is still not complete. At the appropriate time, cash will be moved from the pool to pay taxes (12), to make payments to creditors (13), to make repayments of capital and payments of interest to lenders (14) and to make payments of dividends or other forms of reward to the owners, the original investors (15). The flow of cash through the business is never ending. If there is a blockage at any point, e.g. if sufficient money to purchase raw materials is unavailable - it may be difficult for the company to continue operating, even when the business is healthy in every other regard. Without an injection of cash, trading will cease and the firm will be wound up.
5
A measurement of the efficiency of production, taking the form of a ratio of the output of goods, and services, to the input of factors of production.
Average productivity is the ratio of total output of a process to total inputs;
labour productivity takes account of inputs of employee hours worked;
capital productivity takes account of inputs of machines or land;
and marginal productivity measures the additional output gained from an additional unit of input.
Techniques to improve productivity include a greater use of new technology, altered working practices and improved training of the workforce.
6
CIPD https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/work/productivity#gref
CMI blog...Productivity – are we measuring it correctly? print article
Productivity at work means achieving effective results in as short amount of time as possible, leaving you with more time to enjoy freely. ... Productivity is best achieved when looking at your current way of working, identifying the bottlenecks, flaws, and hindrances, and then finding ways to improve
Organisational Productivity is the capacity of an organisation, institution, or business to produce desired results with a minimum expenditure of energy, time, money, personnel, materiel, etc.
6
The balanced scorecard
The balanced scorecard is a strategic performance management tool that can be used by managers to monitor how business activities are contributing to the organisation’s overall strategy. The Balanced.
7
The balanced scorecard is a strategic performance management tool that can be used by managers to monitor how business activities are contributing to the organisation’s overall strategy. The Balanced Scorecard adds strategic non-financial performance measures to traditional financial metrics to give a more balanced view of organisational performance. Devised by Robert S. Kaplan and David P. Norton in 1992, the balanced scorecard changed conventional thinking about performance metrics. The model has evolved from a simple performance measurement framework to a full strategic planning and management system. It provides a framework of performance measurements and also assists to identify what should be done and measured.
The balanced scorecard takes into account not only the traditional ‘hard' financial measures but three additional categories of ‘soft' quantifiable operational measures
financial perspective - timely and accurate financial data continues to be essential
customer perspective - how an organisation is perceived by its customers
internal perspective - issues in which an organisation must excel through business process improvements
innovation, learning and growth perspective - supported by knowledge management activities and initiatives, areas in which an organisation must improve and add value to its products, services, or operations.
Measurements taken across these four categories are seen to provide a rounded Balanced Scorecard that reflects organisation performance more accurately than one based solely on financial indicators. This in turn assists managers to focus on their mission, rather than merely on short-term financial gain. It also helps to motivate staff to achieve strategic objectives.
How it can help
When used as a strategic planning and management tool, this model can help align an organisation behind a shared vision of success, and get people working on the right things and focusing on results. The value of a scorecard system comes from the continuous selfinquiry and in-depth process of discovery and analysis that is at the heart of the process. The approach has most value if you start with the understanding that you are in it for the long term, and that you will learn a lot about how your organisation needs to work to satisfy customers, stakeholders and employees.
7
Service Level Agreement
A service level agreement (SLA) is an agreement between a service provider and a customer which specifies the level of service to be delivered.
A service level agreement (SLA) focuses on services, technical information and service standards. It is the result of a process of negotiation which recognises needs and constraints on both sides.
A SLA is usually part of a wider 'framework agreement' which is often referred to as the services contract or the outsourcing contract.
The agreement can be an informal contract between two parties or a legally binding contract. The legal terms, if any, are included in the framework agreement.
A SLA is also a tool to gauge performance, but it is different than a KPI. It's an agreement that's between an internal or external service provider and the entity that is the end-user of that service.
8
Template downloaded from CMI if anyone interested.
To be fully understood and used by both parties, a service level agreement should be clearly written and well structured. Those in the organisation who have a thorough understanding of current services, standards and costs should be involved in preparing the SLA to ensure that any new arrangements are as good or better than before.
SLAs (service level agreements) are notoriously difficult to measure, report on, and meet. They can also be difficult to configure and change in many service desks. Still, it’s important to track your performance against top objectives, and SLAs provide a great opportunity to improve customer satisfaction.
Check out metrics used to measure SLA https://www.businesstechweekly.com/operational-efficiency/outsourcing-and-supplier-management/measure-sla-metrics/
8
Financial and non financial tools for measuring business performance
Compare and contrast the following:
Key Performance Indicators
Productivity
Service Level Agreement
Cash flow
ROI
Gross and net profit
Can you find any others – what does your organisation use?
45 minutes RESEARCH ACTIVITY
Compare and contrast = Comparing and contrasting means looking for similarities and differences between two things, which you can see nicely in a Venn diagram
Organisations, whether commercial or not-for-profit, have long been obsessed with managing and measuring performance and there is little sign of this easing up.
Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) are the critical (key) indicators of progress toward an intended result. KPIs provides a focus for strategic and operational improvement, create an analytical basis for decision making and help focus attention on what matters most. As Peter Drucker famously said, “What gets measured gets done.”
Human Resources key performance indicators (HR KPIs) are metrics that are used to see how HR is contributing to the rest of the organization. ... In other words, HR KPIs mirror organizational performance for HR, as they are defined based on theHR outcomes that are relevant to achieve business goals Managing with the use of KPIs includes setting targets (the desired level of performance) and tracking progress against that target. Managing with KPIs often means working to improve leading indicators that will later drive lagging benefits. Leading indicators are precursors of future success; lagging indicators show how successful the organization was at achieving results in the past.
What exactly are KPIs? https://www.bernardmarr.com/default.asp?contentID=762
In simple terms, KPIs provide a way to measure how well companies, business units, projects or individuals are performing in relation to their strategic goals and objectives.
In their broadest sense, KPIs provide the most important performance information that enables organisations (or their stakeholders) to understand whether or not the organisation is on track toward its stated objectives. In this way, well-designed KPIs are vital navigational instruments, giving a clear picture of current levels of performance and whether the business is where it needs to be.
KPIs are also useful decision-making tools. Because they help reduce the complex nature of organisational performance to a small, manageable number of key indicators, KPIs can, in turn, assist decision making – and, ultimately, help improve performance.
Balance Score Card ; https://hbr.org/video/3633937148001/the-explainer-the-balanced-scorecard
https://balancedscorecards.com/balanced-scorecard/
The Balanced Scorecard is a management system. It’s a way of looking at your organization that focuses on your big-picture strategic goals. It also helps you choose the right things to measure so that you can reach those goals.
Traditionally, companies have judged their health by how much money they make. Financial measures are definitely important, but they only give you part of the picture. They focus on the short-term, and you’re trying to build an organization to stand the test of time. The name “balanced scorecard” comes from the idea of looking at strategic measures in addition to traditional financial measures to get a more “balanced” view of performance.
It’s this focus on both high-level strategy and low-level measures that sets the balanced scorecard apart from other performance management methodologies. It takes your big, fuzzy strategic vision and breaks it down into specific, actionable steps to take on a day-to-day basis.
Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)
Service Level Agreement (SLA)
Productivity
Balanced Scorecard
Legal compliance
Sector ratings
Environmental standards as applicable
Articles
https://bia.ca/measuring-your-organizations-performance/
http://www.cimaglobal.com/Documents/ImportedDocuments/9_Performance_Measurement.pdf
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/strategy/analytics
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/strategy/analytics/people-data-driving-performance
9
BREAKTIME
Be back at 7.05pm
10
Why is HR poor at ‘analytics’?
Angrave et al (2016) argue it is lack of awareness of:
HR professionals understanding how human capital contributes to organisational success. Creating, capturing, leveraging & protecting value = a company-specific strategy.
‘Analytics’ needs to be understood re the data and its context.
Need to identify key ‘talent segments’ of those groups of employees that make the most strategic difference to the business / its performance.
Use of data driven decision –making using empirical analysis and statistical / econometric techniques
11
Barriers to HR successfully using analytics
Many HR professionals sceptical – people cannot be reduced to ‘numbers’
HR function lacks skills / insights / knowledge to ask the right questions of the data they have at their disposal
Relatively peripheral position of HR within the organisational hierarchy
Insufficient data
Silo mentalities within a firm
Angrave et al argue for an ‘integrated talent management suite’ (newest HRIS software)
12
The debate
Argument = ‘analytics’ are important to business success but:
either HR is not very good at this or
the ‘wrong’ analytics are being focussed on by HR & a combination of these two issues means
HR is not taken seriously by the top management of the firm
Complexities..
Are we talking separately about HR ‘metrics’; business ‘metrics’ or how they should be linked to create / sustain a high performing / competitive organisation???
13
CIPD Resources
3.2
Systems and data used by people practitioners to provide insights into measuring work and people performance
15
3.2
15
Data measures/systems related to people
Quantative data
Qualitative data
Use of charts, graphs, reports etc
Activity: discuss what people performance data/calculations is used in your organisation and review how these help give insights into people performance and do they add value?
16
As a resource access guide: https://www.cipd.co.uk/Images/peope-analytics-guide_tcm18-51569.pdf
16
Data measures/systems specifically related to organisation
Such as:
Reward
Recruitment
Compliance
Financial
L & D
HR & LMS systems
Activity: in small groups investigate how these help give insights into organisational performance?
17
This Photo by Unknown author is licensed under CC BY-SA-NC.
As a resource access guide: https://www.cipd.co.uk/Images/peope-analytics-guide_tcm18-51569.pdf
17
HR / Business Data could include:
Illness and injury rates
Training completion rate
Employee engagement scores
Employee productivity/performance rates
Team/function-level productivity performance rates
Investment in learning and development (for example cost per head of training)
Revenue/employee (for example revenue per contracted employee or revenue per part-time employee)
Return on investment of the workforce
Employee pay and benefits
Employee–CEO pay gap ratio (for example calculate from pay rates across seniority)
Gender pay gap ratio (for example calculated from pay rates per gender)
Employee turnover rates (for example number of employees who leave per month)
Employee intention to leave
High potential’ turnover rates (for example number of high-performing workers who leave per month)
Succession plan data
Diversity and equality: Career development and progression for minority groups Gender equality in leadership
Talent management: Workforce planning Skills shortages
Employee relations: Industrial action Employee participation in decision making
Things to consider:
Measure the right things
Ask the right question to stakeholders
Discover the context of your data set
18
Measure the right things
You can't optimize what you don't measure. There is not a one-size-fits-all solution. Every business is different and should be treated in a unique way.
Ask the right questions to stakeholders
Go the extra mile to answer all of your stakeholderís questions. This means tapping into the stakeholderís aspirations and challenges by asking the right questions.
It's a must to formulate a clear business question before you start your next data analysis. You can easily waste hours of your time by getting lost in your data. And coming up with "insights" that are already known or not deemed important can be highly frustrating as well!
Discover the context of your data set
Everyone has got data and their own personal data-driven insight (opinion). In most cases, a superior understanding of context leads to the best decisions.
Make sure to establish context for the data you are seeing. What do these numbers mean? Are they important? Does it really affect the business? And how is the data collected?
Data without context isn't that meaningful and can actually lead to bad business decisions because of interpreting it in the wrong way!
18
CIPD resources
19
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/strategy/analytics/factsheet
People analytics can be applied to virtually any aspect of HR activity. For example:
Enhancing employee morale: instead of absorbing the costs of losing key employees, organisations can mitigate against increased attrition rates by measuring the happiness and well-being of their employees and adapting their offer to employees accordingly. Career-development planning, and learning and development for high performers are both ways in which HR departments can use HR data to help improve the morale of the workforce.
Improving retention: An organisation which is suffering from high turnover of key employee groups can use people analytics to anticipate areas with specific issues and can then tailor their incentives to curb attrition accordingly. Better measuring the impact of HR activity on turnover can illustrate the specific needs of certain employee groups, for example adapting incentives for senior leaders to meet their needs if they have specific requirements to keep them from leaving.
More case studies of people analytics in action can be found on our Valuing your Talent web pages and in our research report Human capital analytics and reporting: theory and evidence.
Find out more about how HR and finance professionals are using people data in our report People analytics: driving business performance with people data developed in association with Workday, as well as the international summary reports People analytics: international perspectives.
19
Activity: using this resource to explain how HR might use data to support business planning
20
What does figure 1 tell you about the scope of people analytics?
How can you add value through your data according to figure 2
How is HR people analytics adding value according section 3 and figure 4
Have a look at the KPI example on page 10, and page 11 consider whether these are critical questions that matter in your organisation?
Killer Metrics on page 13, 14 16 & 18 do you recognises these metrics drivers in your organisation and if so how do HR support?
Look at the illustration of the stages of good practice on page 19 -20
Why is evidence important see page 21 & figure 7 on page 22 , how does your organisation compare?
What data failures can you recognise, if any in your organisations practice from looking at figure 8 on page 23
Have a look at the core skills required by HR practitioners in section 6 pages 24-28, are there any areas you would consider developing?
Article
21
https://www.linkedin.com/pulse/breaking-down-3-barriers-implementing-people-analytics-peter-clark
21
Case study
22
People Analytics Case Study: How HR made customers happy https://www.analyticsinhr.com/blog/people-analytics-case-study-how-hr-made-customers-happy/
22
CIPD Resources: Case study
23
CIPD Resources
24
CIPD resources
25
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/strategy/analytics/factsheet
People analytics can be applied to virtually any aspect of HR activity. For example:
Enhancing employee morale: instead of absorbing the costs of losing key employees, organisations can mitigate against increased attrition rates by measuring the happiness and well-being of their employees and adapting their offer to employees accordingly. Career-development planning, and learning and development for high performers are both ways in which HR departments can use HR data to help improve the morale of the workforce.
Improving retention: An organisation which is suffering from high turnover of key employee groups can use people analytics to anticipate areas with specific issues and can then tailor their incentives to curb attrition accordingly. Better measuring the impact of HR activity on turnover can illustrate the specific needs of certain employee groups, for example adapting incentives for senior leaders to meet their needs if they have specific requirements to keep them from leaving.
More case studies of people analytics in action can be found on our Valuing your Talent web pages and in our research report Human capital analytics and reporting: theory and evidence.
Find out more about how HR and finance professionals are using people data in our report People analytics: driving business performance with people data developed in association with Workday, as well as the international summary reports People analytics: international perspectives.
25
CIPD resources
26
(Some) of the writers…
American Management Association (2013) Conquering big data: A study of analytical skills in the workplace. New York: AMA. (global study)
Angrave et al (2016) HR & analytics: Why hr is set to fail the big data challenge. Human Resource Management Journal, 26(1) 1-11.
Heiss, X. (2015) Shared metrics & co-operation between hr & finance to add business value. London: CIPD. (CFO Xerox)
McCarthy, L. (2015) The value wall . London: CIPD.(Group HR Director, SIG)
Roberts, B. (2013) The benefits of big data. HR Magazine, October, 21- 31.
27
https://www.cipd.co.uk/news-views/news-articles/people-analytics-business-performance
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/strategy/analytics
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/strategy/analytics/people-data-driving-performance
27
Next week workshop looking at Task 2 Data analysis and review
28
28
Productivity – are we measuring it correctly_ - CMI.pdf
08/12/2021, 18:16 Productivity – are we measuring it correctly? - CMI
https://www.managers.org.uk/knowledge-and-insights/blog/productivity-are-we-measuring-it-correctly/ 1/4
Home Knowledge & Insights Blog Productivity – are we measuring it correctly?
Blog:
Productivity – are we measuring it correctly? Written by Nigel Girling CMgr CCMI Tuesday 28 September 2021 S h a r e
Measuring productivity just on output isn’t useful for managers – you should base it on value and impact too
We hear a lot about productivity. People publish data about it, make claims about it, try to sell you services to improve it – it’s everywhere.
But a big question that I don’t see being asked enough is: what does ‘productivity’ mean?
In my experience, most people don’t think about it deeply enough and don’t have much of an idea what they are really measuring. It’s just a number, and we can report on it or track its variance. If it’s going up – happy days. If not, then duck in case someone thinks it’s your fault.
The de�nition of productivity most commonly used and understood is ‘the rate of output per unit of input’. This made a certain sense when our economy largely consisted of ‘direct labour’ – producing volumes of output of similar products, often in factories, mills or other manufacturing- related businesses. By this logic, the productivity equation suggests that an output of 1 for an input of 0.5 represents a high level of productivity while an output of 1 from an input of 1.2 is disastrous.
However, to apply that same thinking to our modern world – which often involves highly technical, creative and one-off outputs or decisions of massively differing impacts and values – is simply illogical: what if the �rst is the production of a bolt while the second is the creation of the Covid vaccine?
The problem with productivity Any data or measurement is useless to a manager and leader until:
They have an accurate understanding of what it means. They know why it matters. They understand what they should do differently as a consequence.
This above all is my problem with the equation for productivity. Any compound measure of productivity, such as total output, typically ful�ls none of those three criteria. It tells us little about our effectiveness, gives us no usable insight into how well we are doing and enables no conclusive decisions, other than to gather more data – and gives birth to further data-gathering, graphs, spreadsheets and reports that
08/12/2021, 18:16 Productivity – are we measuring it correctly? - CMI
https://www.managers.org.uk/knowledge-and-insights/blog/productivity-are-we-measuring-it-correctly/ 2/4
Nigel Girling CMgr CCMI is head of centre at Inspirational Development Group (@InspirationalDG). He’s spent 35 years as a CEO, in�uencer and mentor, and is a regular contributor to expert panels, think-tanks, conferences and professional journals.
provide very little insight and are ineffective as a basis for decisive action. Even comparison with past performance is likely to be misleading, especially after Covid.
Productivity is only a helpful indicator if it is compared to expectation – an understanding of what would be a ‘norm’ and of what ‘optimum’ productivity would look like. Without that, it’s like measuring the weather by the percentage of cloud cover – but without factoring in the air temperature, wind speed and whether or not it is raining.
Therefore, I suggest that we shouldn’t measure productivity in the modern world without factoring in the concept of value and impact, and it’s only useful to do so at all as a comparative indicator rather than as an absolute measure.
Measuring value and impact The only sensible benchmarks we can compare our productivity with are:
Meeting stakeholder expectations Optimum performance.
Both require us to already have established a clear picture of what ‘good’ looks like both in general terms and in the eyes of the beholder.
To measure value and impact, I would argue �rst that both must be viewed from a multi-stakeholder perspective – and are often only considered from the perspective of ‘apex stakeholders’ such as investors or customers.
Boost your productivity Use CMI’s Stakeholder Analysis and Management resource to identify and understand each of your stakeholder groups – and benchmark your value and impact.
Stakeholder analysis and management
This is, I believe, one of the big issues that has derailed the ‘employee engagement’ movement in recent years. While some organisations have seen increased employee engagement as a driver of productivity (and therefore as a good thing), employees aren’t likely to see it the same way; an expectation to produce even more output but for the same money and with little bene�t to yourself has little chance of creating engagement or triggering intrinsic motivation.
So, value and impact must relate �rst to meeting the expectations of all stakeholders – and can therefore only be a ‘line of best �t’ through their primary needs. For example, customers want better products for lower prices, investors want dividends and increased share value, while employees want better pay, less stress and better working conditions.
Second, we need to do far more to understand what ‘optimum performance’ looks like. The drive to increase productivity and maximise returns has created, in many organisations at least, a perfect storm of stress, bullying, burnout, damaged mental health and loss of talent.
However, optimum performance is a start. It requires us to draw a line beyond which any further increase in productivity has unacceptable and damaging consequences, and to be clear on the target we are truly aiming for: not just ‘more regardless of consequence’, but the optimum result for all our stakeholders.
Image: Shutterstock/Lek in a BIG WORLD
LIKE THIS ARTICLE? WHY NOT SHARE IT.
08/12/2021, 18:16 Productivity – are we measuring it correctly? - CMI
https://www.managers.org.uk/knowledge-and-insights/blog/productivity-are-we-measuring-it-correctly/ 3/4
You might also like these posts on this topic:
CMI highlights: Companions edition The latest updates for CMI Chartered Companions from the chair of the board of companions, Bob Cryan CBE CMgr CCMI [News]
CMI Highlights What’s going on at CMI this week? Here’s our latest news, events, updates and more – in one easy-to-�nd location [Article] [Communication]
Hey team! Your awesome boss is in the chat Translating your in-person communication skills to digital spaces doesn’t have to be hard [Advice] [Communication]
Hybrid hazards and how to manage them One hazard is �nding time for those micro-transactions – but making the investment could boost your team’s productivity. [Advice] [Communication]
Browse all posts
Don’t miss out - get noti�ed of new content Sign-up to become a Friend of CMI to recieve our free newsletter for a regular round-up of our latest insight and guidance.
CMI members always see more. For the widest selection of content, including CPD tools and multimedia resources, check out how to get involved with CMI membership.
Newsletter
More ways to get involved
08/12/2021, 18:16 Productivity – are we measuring it correctly? - CMI
https://www.managers.org.uk/knowledge-and-insights/blog/productivity-are-we-measuring-it-correctly/ 4/4
Blog This is a space for people to stay up- to-date with all the latest knowledge, opinions and commentary on management and leadership topics from some industry leaders.
Members See More CMI Members have access to thousands of online learning and CPD resources. Learn more about our membership bene�ts
Join The Community CMI offers a variety of �exible membership solutions, tailored to your needs. Find out more and get involved in the CMI community today.
Interact:
Contact Us
Media Centre
Upcoming Events
Login
Community Networks
Careers with CMI
Follow us on:
Products & Services
Management Apprenticeships
End Point Assessment
Chartered Manager
Chartered Management Consultant
ManagementDirect
Members’ Magazine
Accreditation Solutions
© 2021 Chartered Management Institute. All rights reserved
Terms and Conditions Code of Conduct Cookie Policy Data Privacy Accessibility
Service+level+agreement.doc
Document outline
Service Level Agreement
for
organisation name
Introduction
This document outline provides guidelines on the typical contents that should be included in a service level agreement. Service level agreements are prepared for a whole host of different products and services in a variety of industries and markets. This document covers the standard contents that should be included in a service level agreement for products and services.
Typical contents
Parties to the service level agreement
Purpose of the agreement
Definition of the services to be provided
Term of the agreement, including notice period and termination
Financial provisions
Definition of the level of support
Escalation process
Change control procedures
Mechanism for monitoring and measurement of service levels
Client responsibilities
Dispute resolution
Legal considerations
Appendices
Detail to be included in each section
Parties to the service level agreement
This section states the names and head office locations of the organisations involved in the service level agreement.
Purpose of the agreement
This section should detail the purpose of the service level agreement and make reference to:
· the parties involved,
· a summary of the products and services that are to be covered
· the starting point (or source) for the agreement, e.g. whether it is an outsourcing agreement or a contract for the maintenance and support of equipment and or software
· a cross reference to the contract for supply of the equipment/software to be maintained/supported, where applicable.
Definition of the services to be provided
This section defines the services to be provided within the agreement. This should be a detailed definition of the services to be provided and the equipment to be used for the provision of such services (or should link to an appendix that lists the services and equipment). Any mantime elements provided within the service level agreement such as consultancy support on site or any restrictions on the hours of telephone support to be provided should be included in this section.
Term of the agreement including notice period and termination
This section should outline the following:
· the start date, duration and end date of the agreement
· any minimum period for which the agreement will run
· the notice period required for either party to terminate the agreement.
Financial provisions
This section should determine the fees to be paid by the client to the service provider, the payment terms relating to the payment of the fees and any exclusions (such as the cost of on-site visits by the service provider, if they are not included as part of the standard agreement).
Definition of the level of support
The level of support to be provided must be defined in detail and the following elements should be included:
· the hours of cover
· the service provider department, contact names and telephone numbers
· the target response times agreed between the client and the service provider– there is normally a sliding scale based on the severity of the problem, with the most severe having a one hour response time and the least critical being a response time of days rather than hours.
Escalation process
The escalation process should detail the circumstances which necessitate escalation by the client to a higher level of authority, should the service provider fail to meet the agreed service level and the escalation levels to be followed. This will differ per organisation but there will normally be a least two levels of escalation, e.g. from the support desk to the Support Manager to the Customer Services Manager/Director.
Change control procedures
A change control procedure should be detailed that highlights the process to be followed when there is any material change to the products and services supported or any proposed change to the charges. The agreement must take account of changing hardware and software, and the continuity - and improvement - of services to the client during the transition phase.
Mechanism for monitoring and measurement of service levels
A mechanism should be agreed and documented for monitoring and measuring the actual performance of the provider against the agreement. This may be in terms of speed or effectiveness as well as cost. Agreed performance targets or key performance indicators (which should be precise) should be agreed for each service element. Some examples of key performance indicators are mean time between failure of equipment, length of downtime, percentage downtime etc.
Client responsibilities
This section should detail the responsibilities of the client in performance of the agreement. Such responsibilities should include information and materials to be provided to help diagnose problems, installation of any software/hardware updates, contact personnel to be contacted in the client organisation and access requirements to be provided to the service provider.
Dispute resolution
This section should determine the process to be followed should there be a dispute that cannot be resolved through the normal escalation routes (see above). Normally this will be an arbitration process.
Legal considerations
This section should include any legal considerations such as:
Confidentiality – maintenance of confidentiality for service provider and client information
Warranties and liabilities – this covers areas like conformance with standards and use of reasonable endeavours, limits regarding consequential loss, loss of profits etc.
Proprietary rights – who owns the rights to software supported by the service provider.
Appendices
Lists of equipment etc.
Date
Pagination
Version no.
Workforce Analytics Report.pdf
WHAT’S NEXT: FUTURE GLOBAL TRENDS AFFECTING YOUR ORGANIZATION
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
03
sponsored by:
We appreciate the support of the following individuals and companies for their sponsorship of the SHRM Foundation Thought Leadership Initiative:
Richard Klimoski, Ph.D. Karen B. Paul, Ph.D. Coretha M. Rushing, SHRM-SCP Sara Rynes, Ph.D. Mark J. Schmit, Ph.D., SHRM-SCP James R. Schultz Talent Connections, LLC and Career Spa, LLC Jose Tomas, SHRM-SCP
To learn more about how you or your organization can support SHRM Foundation thought leadership and research, please visit:
SHRM Foundation 1
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
May 2016
SHRM Foundation 2
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
The Economist Intelligence Unit
The Economist Intelligence Unit is a research and consulting firm serving companies and institutions establishing and managing operations across national borders. For 60 years it has been a source of information on business developments, economic and political trends, government regulations and corporate practice worldwide. The Economist Intelligence Unit delivers its information in four ways: through its digital portfolio, where its latest analysis is updated daily; through printed subscription products ranging from newsletters to annual reference works; through evidence-based consulting; and by organising seminars and presentations. The firm is a member of The Economist Group.
Copyright
© 2016 The Economist Intelligence Unit Limited. All rights reserved. Neither this publication nor any part of it may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior permission of The Economist Intelligence Unit Limited.
All information in this report is verified to the best of the author’s and the publisher’s ability. However, the Economist Intelligence Unit does not accept responsibility for any loss arising from reliance on it.
SHRM Foundation 3
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
This report was funded and published by the SHRM Foundation. It was researched and written by The Economist Intelligence Unit, in accordance with its policies of objectivity, independence and transparency. All information in this report is verified to the best of the author’s and the publisher’s ability. However, The Economist Intelligence Unit does not accept responsibility for any loss arising from reliance on it.
About this report
SHRM Foundation 4
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
SHRM Foundation 5
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Foreword 7
Executive summary 8
Introduction 9
Section I: Driving forces behind the evolution of workforce analytics
10
Section II: Putting workforce analytics into practice
14
Section III: Implications for HR management function and practice
18
Section IV: Solutions—the development and implementation of workforce analytics
23
Section V: Challenges, obstacles and pitfalls in the implementation of workforce analytics
28
Conclusion 33
Bibliography 34
Table of contents
SHRM Foundation 6
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
SHRM Foundation 7
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Foreword
The use of workforce analytics is transforming human resource strategy. A 2015 Economist Intelligence Unit survey found that 82% of organizations plan to either begin or increase their use of “big data” in HR over the next three years. CEOs are recognizing the importance of talent-related data in managing recruitment, retention, turnover and more. Increasingly, workforce analytics is seen as a critical tool to shape future business strategy. The SHRM Foundation has identified the increased use of workforce analytics as a key future trend for all types of businesses.
In 2013, the SHRM Foundation launched a strategic thought leadership initiative. Working with the Economist Intelligence Unit (EIU), we began a multiphase program to identify and analyze critical trends likely to affect the workplace in the next 5-10 years. We conducted a rigorous process of surveys, expert panel discussions and analysis to identify key themes. A detailed explanation of this process is available online at shrmfoundation.org/ ShapingtheFuture under “Global Trends Identification Process.”
The following three critical themes emerged from our work:
1. Evolution of Work and the Worker. The globalization of business, changing demographics and changing patterns of mobility will continue to change the nature of work and the worker.
2. Engaging and Integrating a Global Workforce. Cultural integration and clashes/unrest will continue to grow globally at both a societal and a corporate level.
3. Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage. Talent shortages will continue to grow globally, requiring HR to become the provider of human capital analytics for input to strategic business decision-making.
The current report, published by the SHRM Foundation, sponsored by IBM Kenexa and written by the Economist Intelligence Unit, presents the data, examples and evidence to support and explain Theme 3, Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage. Two similar reports have been released for the first two themes. We believe these reports provide important insights to help forward-thinking HR and business leaders plan more effectively for the future. In addition, the information in this report presents excellent background information for students and researchers who wish to study the many questions raised.
We encourage you to get involved. Share this information with your colleagues, use it in the classroom or design a research study to extend our knowledge of these issues. You can also support the initiative with a tax-deductible contribution to the SHRM Foundation. I encourage you to visit shrmfoundation.org/ShapingtheFuture to learn more.
Now, please join us as we explore the Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage.
Mark J. Schmit, Ph.D., SHRM-SCP Executive Director, SHRM Foundation May 2016
SHRM Foundation 8
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
The key findings from The Economist Intelligence Unit’s research into workforce analytics are as follows:
Investment in workforce analytics is on the increase Research and supporting evidence detailed in this report strongly suggest that the overwhelming majority of or- ganizations will either begin or increase their use of Big Data1 in HR over the coming years. There are several rea- sons for this reported increase. The use of data has be- come more evident in all functions, and the focus on workforce analytics simply reflects that overall trend. With the acknowledgment that human talent leads to com- petitive advantage in a knowledge economy, any data analysis that can help organizations to attract, motivate and retain the right people is bound to interest execu- tives. Most significantly, stories of companies achieving measurable business outcomes through data analysis have started to emerge, prompting others to increase investment to avoid missing out on potential gains.
The HR function is adapting to a data-driven world, leading to the establishment of specialist teams and the recruitment of data-oriented personnel A 2015 Deloitte survey of business leaders found that many executives had some doubts about the HR func- tion’s ability to perform analytical projects, such as “conducting multi-year workforce planning” or “using HR data to predict workforce performance and im- provement”. A shortfall in the necessary skills to carry out these exercises has been identified. Executives and ac- ademics interviewed for this report consistently argue that a new-style HR professional should possess a combi- nation of two skills—a head for analytics together with the ability to present findings in the manner and lan- guage convincing to senior executives. Organizations are responding to this need, setting up small specialist teams of data analysts, training existing staff and recruit- ing suitable graduates.
1 Big Data is normally defined as an accumulation of data that is too large and complex for processing by traditional database management tools. Most references to “Big Data” in this report will be from surveys conducted by various other companies, and their own definitions may differ slightly. References to “Big Data” are meant to illustrate its growing impact on workforce analytics and other human capital analysis, which we have defined in section 1 of this report.
Retention and recruitment are particular areas of interest; predictive analytics is gaining ground According to 2013 research by Tata Consultancy Servic- es, organizations see the improvement of employee re- tention as the greatest potential benefit of Big Data. An- alytics can highlight which employees are most likely to resign in the short term, enabling the organization to in- tervene to prevent costly turnover. The same survey, as well as much anecdotal evidence, suggests that analyt- ics is also being used to identify the suitability of recruits and gauge their potential loyalty to the organization. These are examples of predictive analytics, using data to identify the likelihood of future outcomes based on historical information. This area looks set to attract in- creasing interest over the coming years.
Despite major progress, cultural and practical obstacles still loom; ethical and legal questions remain subject to uncertainty The skills gap is one potential roadblock to progress. Ac- cording to a 2011 McKinsey report, by 2018 the United States alone could face a shortage of 140,000-190,000 people with “deep analytical skills”. The move to da- ta-based decision-making may also face cultural obsta- cles: some executives could view the increased use of evidence as a threat, with the conclusions from data potentially contradicting their personal judgment.
To ensure the success of workforce analytics, organi- zations should be wary of divorcing data analysis from commercial needs. A 2014 Visier survey of 300 US-based companies found that the greatest business barrier to the successful implementation of workforce analytics was an “unclear connection between workforce ana- lytics and results”.
Issues of ethics and privacy could also impede the march of workforce analytics. Legal rulings on the moni- toring of employee behavior vary from region to region and are still in a state of flux. Some view such monitoring to be beyond the boundaries of acceptable ethical practice.
Executive Summary
SHRM Foundation 9
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
In a 2014 survey by The Economist Intelligence Unit (EIU), twice as many executives based their last major deci- sion on either their “own intuition or experience” or on the “advice and experience of others internally”, rather than on “data and analysis”.2 This finding applies to the decisions in all functions of an organization, whether in finance, marketing, sales or human resources (HR). De- spite having access to more data and analytical power than ever before, many organizations are still not relying on either to make significant decisions.
Nevertheless, the corporate world is starting to under- go fundamental changes in the way workforce decisions are made. Further evidence detailed in this report sug- gests that CEOs are now recognizing the importance of talent-related data and that the field of human resourc- es is beginning to fully embrace the data revolution.
More and more organizations are becoming interest- ed in workforce analytics as a means of better manag-
2 Economist Intelligence Unit report for PwC (2014), Gut and Gigabytes (http://www.economistinsights.com/sites/default/files/Gut_%26_gigabytes_ Capitalising_on_the_art_%26_science_in_decision_making.pdf)
ing their workforce as well as shaping future business strategy. These developments may not just have very positive implications for the organization; they also promise to elevate the standing of HR as a function. Sur- vey evidence shows how HR’s credibility increases dras- tically once it starts using data to inform its decisions.
This paper will provide an overview of developments in workforce analytics today. Section I discusses the rea- sons for this growing focus on analytics. Section II exam- ines the theoretical underpinnings of workforce analyt- ics. In Section III we examine how the use of analytics is reshaping the HR function itself and how this affects the people who work in it. Section IV is focused on practical implementation and outlines examples of workforce an- alytics providing genuine competitive advantage. Last- ly, in Section V, we outline some common pitfalls to avoid as we move toward a world where evidence will play a central role in people-management decisions.
Introduction
SHRM Foundation 10
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Writing at the end of 2010, Alec Levenson of the Center for Effective Organizations at the University of Southern California commented that “at the beginning of the decade, human resources analytics was not part of the language of business”. But the subsequent years, he then continued, witnessed the sprouting of a major new trend that promised to change HR methods and solu- tions in a fundamental way. “Today, at the end of the decade,” he noted, “a Google search for the same term produces more than 1.5m results.”3
The trend has, if anything, accelerated since Dr Lev- enson wrote these words. A 2015 survey by The EIU found that 82% of organizations would either begin or increase their use of Big Data in HR over the next three years.4 To what, then, can we attribute the rapid expansion of this field?
For the purposes of this study and report, The EIU has defined workforce analytics as the process of integrat- ing data into human resource management to optimize organizational efficiency and drive strategy.
Joining the club Data analysis is becoming a ubiquitous phenomenon in the business world. The finance, customer service and sales functions all use data extensively, and companies are now seeking more analysis in the realm of human resources as well.
The economic turbulence that many companies ex- perienced between 2008 and 2009 certainly played a
3 Alec Levenson (2011), Using Targeted Analytics to Improve Talent Decisions, Center for Effective Organizations publication (http://ceo.usc.edu/pdf/ G11-03.pdf)
4 Economist Intelligence Unit report for KPMG (2015), Evidence-based HR (https://www.kpmg.com/Global/en/IssuesAndInsights/ArticlesPublications/ Documents/evidence-based-hr.pdf), also referenced in the Executive summary.
role in the expansion of workforce analytics. “The finan- cial crisis convinced businesses of the importance of an- alytics,” says Jonathan Ferrar, vice president of Smarter Workforce at IBM. “Businesses could become competi- tive again through internal changes that increased pro- ductivity and efficiency, despite a challenging environ- ment.” Workforce analytics was a logical component of a drive for efficiency among organizations aiming to emerge from the market turmoil in a stronger competi- tive position.
However, despite substantial advances from aca- demic researchers (see Section II) and a band of for- ward-thinking companies, many organizations have been slow to realize the potential value of workforce analytics. Research from 2012 and published in 2013 by Tata Consultancy Services, an Indian global IT services, consulting and business solutions firm, shows that at that time HR was not a principal focus of Big Data invest- ment.5 (Figure 1).
Figure 1
Where companies across industries focused their 2012 Big Data investments (as a percentage of total Big Data investments)
Source: The Emerging Big Returns on Big Data, A TCS 2013 Gobal Trend Study (page 43).
Distribution/ Logistics
HR
Other (Procurement, legal, etc.)
Finance/ Accounting
IT
Manufacturing/ Production
Marketing
Sales
Customer Service
R&D/Product Development/ Product Engineering
15.0
13.3 11.3
11.1
8.3
7.7
6.7 5.0
6.4 15.2
Indeed, senior executives interviewed for this report con- sistently remarked that workforce analytics remains an emerging field. Only recently have a large number of organizations begun to understand the true benefits of
5 Tata Consultancy Services (2013), The Emerging Big Returns of Big Data (http://www.tcs.com/SiteCollectionDocuments/Trends_Study/TCS-Big-Data- Global-Trend-Study-2013.pdf)
WHAT IS WORKFORCE ANALYTICS?
Workforce analytics uses statistical models and other techniques to analyze worker-related data, allowing leaders to improve the effectiveness of people-related decision-making and human resources strategy.
Section I: Driving forces behind the evolution of workforce analytics
SHRM Foundation 11
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
workforce analytics. As a result, they have started to in- vest in and implement workforce analytics solutions with a regular and meaningful impact. “I attended a work- shop in 2010, and there were only about a dozen firms in attendance talking about HR analytics,” says Mr Ferrar. “It took another two years before the momentum shift occurred. Now lots of people are talking, some are ac- tive, many are still considering how to change the cul- ture of HR to become analytical.”6
Josh Bersin, founder of Bersin by Deloitte, a research and advisory firm, makes a similar point. “Turning HR met- rics into meaningful business data is relatively new. While nearly every organization I talk with wants to build a tal- ent analytics capability, many companies have still not built the business case.”7
It can be no surprise, therefore, that a 2015 Human Capital Institute survey revealed that nearly 80% of lead- ers were still using gut feeling and personal opinions to make decisions that affected talent-management practices.8
Intelligible data The first step to introducing more data analysis into the HR decision-making process is having the will to do it. That in itself is not enough, however. The data must also be presented in a clear and accessible way for work- force analytics to yield genuine commercial impact. Clear conclusions can only derive from well-organized data.
Several companies have understood the need to be more active on the workforce analytics front, and they have been busy organizing available data in an easily digestible format amenable to detailed scrutiny. Until re-
6 EIU interview with Jonathan Ferrar, July 31st 2015.
7 Harvard Business Review Analytic Services, HR Joins the Analytics Revolution (https://hbr.org/resources/pdfs/comm/visier/18765_HBR_Visier_Report_ July2014.pdf)
8 Human Capital Institute in partnership with Oracle (2015), Insightful HR: Integrating Quality Data for Better Talent Decisions (http://pcdn4.hci.org/ files/field_content_file/2015%20Oracle.pdf)
cently, this information tended to be inconsistent and difficult to collect, often because of different systems in many countries and departments in a multinational or- ganization. Therefore, few companies had the capacity to extract worthwhile conclusions from their HR data.
In the PwC Annual Global CEO Survey from 2012, for example, more than 80% of CEOs stressed how impor- tant talent-related data were to their organization, but only a relatively small minority professed satisfaction with the information they were getting (Figure 2).9
Mr Ferrar agrees. “I meet many clients who still have this problem. Data governance is an important element in providing a solid foundation for analytics. But it’s not the only step, and executives should not let ‘perfect data’ get in the way of more important business issues. I find some clients use ‘poor data’ as an excuse for not wanting to change HR to be more analytical.”10
The war for talent Interest in workforce analytics is accelerating rapidly as more companies acknowledge the importance of hu- man talent. IBM’s Fifth Biennial Global CEO Study from 2012 discovered that CEOs believed human capital to be the main source of sustainable economic value (Fig- ure 3). Leaders are now realizing that the abilities, enter- prise and enthusiasm of people are key to organization- al performance in the modern-day knowledge economy. Given that reality, it follows that any data helping companies to recruit the right talent, deploy them correctly and retain their high performers will be highly valued.
9 PwC (2012), 15th Annual Global CEO Survey (https://www.pwc.com/gx/en/ ceo-survey/pdf/15th-global-pwc-ceo-survey.pdf)
10 EIU interview with Jonathan Ferrar, July 31st 2015.
Information gap, according to CEOs (Percentage of CEOs)
Source: PwC 15th Annual Global CEO Survey 2012.
Do not receive informationNot adequate Adequate but would like moreInformation received is comprehensive 100
80
60
40
20
0 Cost of employee
turnover Return on investment
on human capital Labour costsAssessments of
internal advancement Employees’ views
and needs Staff
productivity
% of CEOs who believe the relevant information is important or very important
Information Gap: CEOs believe information is important but don't receive comprehensive reports
Figure 2
SHRM Foundation 12
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Figure 3
CEOs don’t want data only to understand their current situation. They are turning to evidence-based analysis to reach conclusions that can help alter approaches to a broad range of common HR challenges, shape their overall business strategy and confer competitive advan- tage (Figure 4).
According to research by Tata Consultancy Services, organizations see the improvement of employee reten- tion as the greatest potential benefit of Big Data.11 De-
11 Tata Consultancy Services (2013), The Emerging Big Returns of Big Data.
tailed analysis can indicate which employees are most likely to resign in the short term and which factors make this disruptive exodus of invaluable employees more like- ly. After all, it can be very expensive to recruit and train adequate replacements.
A virtuous cycle It could be that some executives view increased use of evidence as a threat, with the conclusions from data potentially contradicting their personal judgment. The one factor most likely to overcome such cultural barriers and boost efforts to improve HR analytics is when com- petitors register clear business gains from using it.
Research for a 2013 Bersin by Deloitte report divided 480 organizations into four categories based on the ma- turity of their workforce analytics practice (Figure 5). The results showed that few companies had as yet reached an advanced level, with the majority still struggling to or- ganize their data in a coherent form.12 “Our study,” the report concludes, “found that a staggering 86% of the organizations we surveyed are focused primarily on re- porting… Just 10% of organizations in our study have tak- en the next step toward advanced analytics—helping business leaders solve their talent challenges through statistical analyses. A mere 4% are using predictive ana- lytics to forecast future talent outcomes.”
12 Bersin by Deloitte (2013), High-Impact Talent Analytics: Building a World-Class HR Measurement and Analytics Function (http://www.bersin. com/Practice/Detail.aspx?id=16909)
Percentage of CEOs indicating that a factor contributed to sustainable economic value
Source: IBM Fifth Biennial Global CEO Study, 2012.
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Access to raw materials Corporate social responsibility
Assets (physical, infrastructure) Price/revenue innovation
R&D, intellectual property Partnership networks
Technology Business model innovation
Brand(s) Products/services innovation
Data access, data-driven insights Customer relationships
Human capital 71 66
52 43
33 30
28 25
22 19
15 13
8
Degree of potential benefits Big Data could generate – mean summary – human resources/personnel
Source: UN Population Division.
No benefits Moderate benefits Very high benefits
0 1 2 3 4 5
Identifying potential recruits who work outside the company
Finding employees with the right knowledge to deal with a company issue
Finding information in the company's digital archives
Identifying internal mentors who could coach other employees
Determining the most valuable employees
Gauging employee morale/engagement
Determining optimal job candidates for a certain job/building more predictive profiles for hiring
Determining employees to promote and provide other rewards
Identifying effectiveness of recruiting campaigns
Improving employee retention by determining who is most likely to leave and trying to discourage them
Figure 4
SHRM Foundation 13
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Figure 5
The results claimed for Level 3 and 4 companies—those boasting the most mature analytics functions—were no- table. In financial terms, the stock prices of these organ- izations had on average outpaced the S&P 500 by 30% over the previous three years. They were also twice as likely as the rest to report that they had improved their recruitment efforts and leadership pipelines, and three times more likely to have realized cost savings and effi- ciency gains.
Clear success stories are starting to emerge alongside these general statistics, reinforcing the impression that data analytics offers huge potential for increasing com- petitive advantage.
For example, a large financial services company saw dramatic variations in sales performance and retention among its hundreds of sales representatives (Figure 6).
After significant statistical analysis the team found that the company’s prevailing assumptions about its human capital assets were wrong. The high performers were not those from the top universities or those with the highest grades. Rather, what predicted top performance were lack of misspellings in résumés, successful experience selling related products, and any academic degree (but which one, and which grade, did not matter). By adopting these new priorities when reviewing candi- dates, the company generated more than US$4m of new revenue in the first six months.13
The rest of this paper will explore additional examples and case studies of organizations embracing workforce analytics. It will demonstrate the need for senior deci- sion-makers to embrace workforce analytics as an es- sential aspect of strategic HR.
13 John Bersin, “The Datafication of HR”, Deloitte University Press, Deloitte Review, Issue 14, January 17th 2014 (http://dupress.com/articles/ dr14-datafication-of-hr/)
Level of analytics at large companies (%)
Source: Bersin by Deloitte.
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Level 1: Reactive- Operational Reporting
Level 2: Proactive- Advanced Reporting
Level 3: Strategic Analytics
Level 4: Predictive Analytics
4%
10%
30%
56%
Characteristics of high-performing sales candidates
What didn’t matter What did matter
Source: Deloitte University Press, The Datafication of HR.
• College degree or reputation of college
• Grade point average
• Lack of typos or misspellings in résumés
• Quality of references • Successful experience completing some academic degree (which one did not matter)
• Successful experience selling related products (autos and real estate)
Figure 6
SHRM Foundation 14
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
The right mindset: Buying into workforce analytics Leaders of organizations can only derive the full benefits of workforce analytics if they believe in its potential. To establish and maintain the necessary commitment, they first have to believe that their company’s HR assets (i.e., the value of its workforce) are a vital contributor to or- ganizational performance. Second, they must believe that such assets have definable, quantitative value, and
that HR assets can be measured and managed in the same way that the finance function tracks return on in- vestment (ROI).
A vast array of academic literature, asserting the po- tential impact of workforce strategy on organizational performance and suggesting practical ways in which HR assets can be measured and managed, can help to influence this mindset (see box).
Section II: Putting workforce analytics into practice
History of HR metrics and workforce analytics
Although the influence of workforce analytics has started to be seen more widely, specialist HR academics have been active in this field for several decades. Below is an outline of some of the main milestones in the evolution of workforce analytics.14
Early 20th century: Systematic work on measures to represent the effectiveness of an organization’s employees dates back almost a century. For example, the work carried out by the German-American researcher Hugo Münsterberg for companies was eventually published in a 1913 book entitled Psychology and Industrial Efficiency. Münsterberg argued that in order to increase productivity and employee satisfaction, it was vital to hire workers for positions that fit their abilities and personality. Consequently, he composed mental tests and job simulations to test the applicant’s knowledge, skills and abilities relevant for the particular job.15
1940s: Quantitative analysis methods were used to build up the armed forces and necessary materiel during the second world war. In these early applications, scientists utilized simple mathematical models to make efficient use of limited technologies and resources.16
1980s: Many of the HR metrics used in organizations derive from the work of Jac Fitz-enz and the early benchmarking research he conducted at the Saratoga Institute. In 1984 Dr Fitz-enz published How to Measure Human Resources Management, which gives an overview of many HR metrics and the formulae used to calculate them. These metrics were developed through the joint efforts of the Saratoga Institute and the American Society for Personnel Administration (ASPA), the predecessor of the current Society for Human Resource Management (SHRM).
1990s to present day: The balanced scorecard, devised by Robert Kaplan and David Norton in their 1996 book of the same name, recognizes the limitations of organizations’ heavy reliance on financial indicators of performance. Such measures focus on what has already happened rather than providing managers with information about what will happen. Balanced scorecards instead use a variety of measures, including customer satisfaction, process effectiveness and employee development, as well as financial performance.17
14 Kevin D. Carlson and Michael J. Kavanagh, HR Metrics and Workforce Analytics (http://www.sagepub.com/sites/default/files/upm-binaries/41672_6.pdf)
15 See web biography of Hugo Münsterberg by Donald F Knessi (http://faculty.frostburg.edu/mbradley/psyography/hugomunsterberg.html)
16 Lee J. Krajewski and Howard E. Thompson (1981), Management Science: Quantitative Methods in Context. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
17 Robert Kaplan and David Norton (1996), The Balanced Scorecard: Translating Strategy into Action. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Press.
SHRM Foundation 15
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Mark Huselid’s work on high-performance HR systems offered evidence that human resource management could indeed improve operational effectiveness and play a major role in the fulfillment of organizational strat- egy.18 Brian Becker, Huselid and David Ulrich (2001) helped bring these ideas together in the HR scorecard, which highlights how the alignment of HR activities with both corporate strategy and activity improves organiza- tional outcomes.19
Mark Huselid, professor of workforce analytics at Northeastern University in Boston, Massachusetts and au- thor of several leading books on the topic, argues that an organization’s competitive advantage derives just as much from what he calls a differentiated workforce— where jobs that create the most value receive the most investment—as it does from its products and services.
Professor Huselid developed a four-stage framework, elements of which have been adopted by several lead- ing companies, for thinking about the relationship be- tween workforce differentiation and strategic success.20 These range from Stage 1, where an organization simply identifies and copies existing best practices in its industry, through to Stage 4, which involves first pinpointing the roles that contribute most to the success of the organiza- tion and then ensuring that they are carried out to maxi- mum effect (Figure 7). Other academics may differ on the details, but many now subscribe to the idea that compet- itive advantage can be realized through HR strategy.
18 Mark Huselid (1995), The impact of human resource management practices on turnover, productivity and corporate financial performance (http://www. markhuselid.com/pdfs/articles/1995_AMJ_HPWS_Paper.pdf)
19 Brian Becker, Mark Huselid and David Ulrich (2001), The HR Scorecard. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Press.
20 Huselid M. A., B. Becker and R. Beatty (2009), The Differentiated Workforce, Transforming Talent into Strategic Impact. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Press.
Getting the measurement right Academics have also devoted much attention to the question of how to measure the benefits and costs of HR assets. The reliability of such measurement underpins workforce analytics. Organizations are less likely to invest heavily in workforce analytics without genuine faith in the concept of HR measurement.
However, despite academic research dating back several decades, the quest for standardized HR meas- urement is still a work in progress. Few organizations to date have been able to demonstrate clearly what their human capital assets are actually worth in financial terms, quantify their future value, or assess their precise impact on organizational performance.
Wayne Cascio, professor of management and Rob- ert H Reynolds chair in global leadership at the University of Colorado-Denver, believes that to be credible and therefore attract executive interest and investment, an HR measurement system should have four elements: log- ic, analytics, measures and process—the LAMP frame- work.21 (Figure 8). This framework, which was formulated by Peter Ramstad, senior vice president of human re- sources and chief human resources officer at Capella Education Company, and John Boudreau, professor of management and organization, University of Southern California Marshall School of Business, helps us to under- stand exactly where workforce analytics fits into this overall picture.
Figure 8
21 John W. Boudreau and Peter M. Ramstad (2007), Beyond HR. Boston, MA: Harvard Business Publishing.
The four stages of workforce differentiation
Sources: Huselid M. A., B. Becker and R. Beatty, The Differentiated Workforce, Transforming Talent into Strategic Impact, 2009.
Differentiate by jobs within strategic capabilities
Workforce strategy differentiated based on “A” jobs in strategic capabilities
Differentiate by strategic capability
Workforce strategy differentiated based on talent requirements of strategic capabilities
Generic Fit
Select 2-3 types of workforce strategies to fit 2-3 types of generic corporate strategies
One Size Fits All
Workforce strategy aligned with external best practices instead of corporate strategy
Fit between strategy and workforce differentiation
Lo w
Im pa
ct
St ra
te gi
c Im
pa ct
o f W
or kf
or ce
S tr
at eg
y
H ig
h Im
pa ct
Workforce strategy matches competitors
Weak fit
Workforce strategy is distinctive
Strong fit
Figure 7
The LAMP framework
Source: Cascio, W. and John Boudreau, Investing in People, 2011 page 10.
LOGIC : The story that
connects numbers and
outcomes
ANALYTICS : Drawing the
right conclusions from data
MEASURES : Using the right
numbers
PROCESS : Using data to
influence decisions
HR METRICS : A force for strategic change
SHRM Foundation 16
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
First, according to the framework, there must be a clear chain of logic between what is being measured and the expected outcome. The logic element presents the business case for the research, pinpointing possible important connections between numbers and effects and thus capturing the interest of executive deci- sion-makers. For example, there could be a particular connection between employee attitudes and customer satisfaction that is well worth investigating.
Analytics is concerned with drawing the right conclu- sions from data. Sound analytics, based on solid re- search principles, takes care to avoid attributing causa- tion where only correlation can be proven. For example, if both positive employee attitudes and high customer satisfaction are evident at the same location, it might be that the latter is influencing the former, not the other way around. “Mistaking causation for correlation is a huge issue in HR, and it’s a very easy mistake to make,” says Professor Cascio.22
Measures must be of high quality—timely, consistent, complete and reliable. They must also be carefully tai- lored to the strategic question that needs answering. Process is the last component of the framework and in- volves using the unearthed data to influence deci- sion-makers. Showing clear connections between or- ganizational performance and simple measures, such as employee turnover, can constitute the first step to persuading executives of the value of this field and en- sure their future commitment. “A significant factor in the effectiveness of a solution depends on the willingness of the necessary constituencies to embrace the analysis,” notes Professor Boudreau.23
From theory to practice Academics may provide the theoretical framework, but how have organizations fared in putting this into prac- tice and measuring their HR assets?
Mr Ferrar leads the analytics practice for IBM Smarter Workforce, helping clients improve business perfor- mance through the application of people-related ana- lytics solutions, and is thus in a prime position to see what the corporate world has achieved in this regard. Sup- porting the thesis put forward in Section I that the field of workforce analytics has only recently started to attract the necessary attention, Mr Ferrar believes that many companies are still struggling at the first couple of stag- es. Even if they have, in theory, bought into the potential of workforce analytics, they are failing to establish the logic that Cascio and Boudreau deem to be the basis of any measurement system.
“HR professionals struggle with making linkages to business outcomes,” says Mr Ferrar. “They spend a lot of
22 EIU interview with Wayne Cascio, July 23rd 2015.
23 EIU interview with John Boudreau, July 30th 2015.
time focusing on the detail of HR processes and pro- grams, and the data and reporting associated with them. Instead, they should ask: what business problem do I want to solve, how will data help me, and what data should I use? For example, they should be asking questions such as: which roles are responsible for the most revenue, or which workforce drivers will improve customer loyalty?”
Despite some challenges in this fast-developing field, a buzz of excitement surrounds the achievements of a minority of companies, encouraging others to follow in their footsteps.
Companies have used workforce analytics to drive competitive advantage in a variety of ways, making im- portant connections between different groups of avail- able data. For example, the global aerospace and de- fense company Lockheed Martin correlated information on individual performance with knowledge-manage- ment information, such as identifying those employees who had undergone formal training in specific are- as. This enabled the company not only to spot top per- formers, but also to discover which training programs might have led to improved performance.
Sysco, a major global food services company, estab- lished a link between certain management actions on the one hand, and employee engagement and reten- tion on the other. By doing so, it was able to improve the retention rate for delivery associates—employees who provide customer service and build customer relation- ships—from 65% to 85%, thus saving the company an es- timated US$50m in hiring and training costs.24
Many companies, especially in the retail and services sectors, need to have credible and comprehensive data to allocate their talent needs in real time as a way of optimizing work schedules and workflow. Retailers such as Best Buy, Apple, Nordstrom and Amazon can use analytics to predict incoming call-center volume as well as adjust hourly employees’ schedules to maximize efficiency and resource planning.
Meanwhile, 3M, a company that prides itself on inno- vation, uses data modeling to show managers compen- sation, recruiting, benefits and other metrics so they can better understand their workforce and maximize pro- ductivity. 3M modeling showed that business laborato- ries with higher engagement scores were also more suc- cessful commercially two years later.
They also found that data were useful in problem-solv- ing. In India, for example, 3M was experiencing a slightly elevated personnel turnover. The company initially thought the problem was retention, but analytics re- vealed that part of its recruitment process was the root cause of the difficulties, rather than the work environ-
24 T. Davenport, J. Harris & J. Shapiro, “Competing on talent analytics”, Harvard Business Review, October 2010 (https://hbr.org/2010/10/competing-on- talent-analytics)
SHRM Foundation 17
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
ment. Some candidates given job offers were simply not showing up on the first day owing to multiple offers, and by changing part of the recruitment process, with more follow-up, the turnover increase was rectified.25
The case study below goes into more detail about
25 Interview with Karen B. Paul, Leader, Global Measurement Center of Expertise, 3M.
one particular company’s journey into the analytics space. A growing number of real-world experiences such as these are making believers out of executive leaders and creating buy-in that fuels investment in workforce analytics.
CASE STUDY: Connecting HR data and business outcomes at Lowe’s
Lowe’s is an American company which operates a chain of retail home improvement and appliance stores. Since 2007 the company has been using a data-driven HR business model to highlight the connections between HR decisions and business outcomes.
As always, the first hurdle was to build the necessary business logic to establish management belief in the project across various departments. Lowe’s analytics team sought to link various HR data (such as engagement, turnover and sick time) to marketing data (such as customer satisfaction and loyalty), operations data (such as shrinkage, which measures inventory loss resulting from factors such as employee theft and fraud) and financial metrics (such as sales per square foot and net income before tax).26
Once leaders arrived at a consensus on the business logic behind HR policies, a cross-functional team comprising finance, marketing and operations, facilitated and supported by the human resources division, was established. The result was a set of statistical models that were built with inputs from across the company and were therefore accepted by all major stakeholders across the organization.
Results and impact One of the major findings from the analysis was the relationship between employee engagement, customer satisfaction and the impact on revenue. Lowe’s intuitively sensed that there was a connection between engagement and customer satisfaction, and through this analytics exercise the company was able to attribute a monetary value to this linkage. One example of a quantitative conclusion was the relationship between engagement and average ticket—the amount of money a customer spends per transaction. By encouraging greater dialogue (including asking customers a specific set of questions) between employees and customers, customers felt they were having a better store experience and spent 4% more. Lowe’s reached a conservative estimate that the gap between the highest and lowest engaged stores constituted more than US$1m in sales per year.
After what Wayne Cascio, professor of management at the University of Colorado-Denver, calls measures and analytics, comes the process— using the results to make real decisions which impact the business. Management shared the results with the grass roots of the company, improving the chances that systemic change would be deeply rooted. As a result, focus on employee engagement has spread throughout the entire organization. Management teams appreciate the value of employee engagement and are keen to learn how engaged their own teams are and what they can do to boost engagement. In this way, workforce analytics has achieved genuine, sustainable change with measurable business outcomes that have resulted in competitive advantage for the firm.
26 http://c.ymcdn.com/sites/www.hrps.org/resource/collection/86D817D1-E244-4847-A103-BC7E19E57AB6/HRPS_PS34-2_Final.pdf
Figure 9
LOWE’S first store model blueprint
Source: http://c.ymcdn.com/sites/www.hrps.org/resource/collection/ 86D817D1-E244-4847-A103-BC7E19E57AB6/HRPS_PS34-2_Final.pdf.
In this model, ovals indicate an item that is constructed of multiple variables and rectangles indicate individual variables. Lines with arrows on both ends are co-varying relationships. meaning that the two items impact each other. Lines with arrows pointing in one direction indicate that one item is impacting the other. The numeric values are regression error terms that show how much impact one item has on another (e.g., if A impacts B with a score of .14, then when A moves one unit, B will move .14). Positive values indicate that when one item goes up, the other item will also go up. Negative values indicate that when one item goes up, the other item will go down.
Employee Engagement
Customer Satisfaction
Management Engagement
Sales Ratios
Better Shrink Numbers
.22
.32
-.13
.17
SHRM Foundation 18
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Strategic HR—a new emphasis Over the years HR has moved beyond personnel man- agement—routine activities such as the administration of payroll and benefits—and has worked to assume a more pivotal role in developing people strategy and supporting the organization’s business goals.
This shift is occurring for two main reasons. First, as Pro- fessor Huselid points out in The Workforce Scorecard, HR has already reached a high level of efficiency in admin- istrative tasks through the use of outsourcing or electron- ic processing. “Simply put, the low-hanging fruit in the domain of HR functional efficiency has largely been col- lected,” he writes.27 Moreover, he says, spending on the HR function accounts for a very small proportion of total operating expenditure, and is thus not a commercial pri- ority.
On the other hand, expenditure on the workforce in general, in terms of salaries and associated costs, ac- counts for a major proportion of operating expenditure, averaging approximately 70%.28 The perceived impact of workforce capabilities on organizational perfor- mance has grown with the development of the knowl- edge economy. Therefore, the HR function, with its peo- ple knowledge, can add significant value by learning to harness the potential of the workforce in supporting the organization’s goals.
As HR learns to demonstrate the clear connection be- tween people-related strategy and business outcomes, workforce analytics will help HR continue to grow into a more strategic role. But how far has HR progressed on this journey? Is the function prepared for an increased focus on workforce analytics? If not, what steps will need to be taken, and where will the necessary skills and tal- ent be found?
27 Mark A. Huselid, Brian E. Becker and Richard W. Beatty (2005), The Workforce Scorecard: Managing Human Capital To Execute Strategy. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Press.
28 Human Capital Management Institute, Managing an Organization’s Biggest Cost: The Workforce (http://www.hcminst.com/files/OrgPlus_Total_Cost_ Workforce_.pdf)
The HR skills shortfall Evidence suggests that this transition is still evolving. A 2015 Deloitte report, based on a survey of several thou- sand executives from within the HR function and outside, shows there is room for improvement.29 While a majority of executives said that many aspects of HR were very important to their business, a significantly lower number expressed confidence in their organization’s readiness to handle these issues.
For example, as shown in Figure 10, the average score awarded to the importance of “reinventing HR” or “HR and people analytics” is substantially greater than the corresponding score for the organization’s readiness to respond to these particular challenges. In addition, per- ception among business leaders outside HR differed from that within the function. For “reinventing HR”, they rated HR’s readiness 20% lower than HR leaders.
Figure 10
This gap places a question-mark over HR’s ability to meet executive expectations in support of business initi- atives. Furthermore, only a small proportion of survey re- spondents gave high marks to HR capabilities such as “preparing HR staff to deliver programs aligned with
29 Deloitte University Press (2015), Global Human Capital Trends 2015 (http:// d2mtr37y39tpbu.cloudfront.net/wp-content/uploads/2015/08/DUP_ GlobalHumanCapitalTrends2015.pdf)
Talent trends: Importance vs. readiness
Source: Deloitte University Press, Global Human Capital Trends 2015.
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
100 ReadinessImportance
Pe op
le da
ta ev
er yw
he re
Ma ch
in es
as ta
len t
Si mp
lif ica
tio n o
f w or
k
HR &
pe op
le an
aly tic
s
Pe rfo
rm an
ce m
an ag
em en
t
Wo rk
fo rc
e c ap
ab ili
ty
Re in
ve nt
in g H
R
Le ar
ni ng
& de
ve lo
pm en
t
Le ad
er sh
ip
Cu ltu
re &
en ga
ge me
nt
Not important
Very important
Important
Somewhat important
Not ready
Very ready
Ready
Somewhat ready
-31 -36 -28 -29 -27 -29 -31 -26 -20
-19
-28 -29 -27 -26
-20 -19
78 78 74 71 70 68 66 63
55 5047
42 46
42 43 39 35 37 35
31
Section III: Implications for HR management function and practice
SHRM Foundation 19
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
business needs”, and a significant proportion (between one-third and one-half) regarded them as “poor” (Fig- ure 11). Clearly there is work to be done, as well as room for improvement.
Figure 11
Respondents’ evaluations of their organizations’ work- force analytics capabilities were similarly negative. The majority had a dim assessment of the HR function’s abil- ity to perform analytical projects, such as “conducting multi-year workforce planning” or “using HR data to pre- dict workforce performance and improvement”. (Figure 12).
Figure 12
Ram Charan, the author and consultant, wrote in a 2014 Harvard Business Review article that the expertise of the HR function may not always have adapted fully to the data revolution: “Most [HR practitioners] are process-ori- ented generalists who have expertise in personnel ben- efits, compensation, and labor relations.”30
30 Ram Charan, “It’s time to split HR”, Harvard Business Review, July 2014 (https://hbr.org/2014/07/its-time-to-split-hr)
Putting an emphasis on benchmarking, rather than what Professor Huselid refers to as “strategic perfor- mance metrics”, may be part of this mindset. “HR profes- sionals have routinely relied on benchmarked compari- sons of cost and other efficiency-based performance outcomes associated with activities of the HR function,” write Huselid and Becker. “But a reliance on this type of benchmarking measures not only fails to measure HR’s important contributions to firm success; it also can en- courage an approach to human capital management that is counterproductive.” It will ultimately result, they argue, in HR being managed like a commodity, rather than as a strategic asset (Figure 13).31
Figure 13
31 Brian Becker and Mark Huselid, “Measuring HR? Benchmarking is Not the Answer!”, HR Magazine, December 2003 (http://markhuselid.com/pdfs/ articles/2003%20Becker-Huselid%20HR%20Magazine.pdf)
Respondents’ views of HR’s capabilities
Source: Deloitte Univesity Press Global Human Capital Trends 2015 (page 62).
0 20 40 60 80 100
Excellent Not applicableAdequateWeak
Holding HR accountable for
providing innovative solutions and programs
Preparing HR staff to deliver programs
aligned with business needs
Providing HR staff with appropriate
training and experiences
34 55 11
41 46 12
43 46 101
Evaluation of workforce analytics capabilities
Source: Deloitte University Press, Global Human Capital Trends 2015, page 72.
Utilizing HR and talent operational reporting
and scorecards
Conducting multi-year workforce planning
Correlating HR data to business performance
Using HR data to predict workforce performance
and improvement
0 20 40 60 80 100
Excellent AdequateWeakNot applicable
2015
2014
2015
2014
2015
2014
2015
2014 1 66 26 7
2 69 25 4
1 62 29 8
1 61 33 5
0 62 31 7
3 59 33 5
2 51 39 8
2 53 36 9
Benchmarking vs. strategic performance metrics
Source: Measuring HR? Benchmarking is Not the Answer!, HR Magazine, December 2003, page 58.
Emphasizes administrative efficiency as performance standard
HR function is primarily a cost-center
Measures based on dollar equivalents
Low risk, low return
Can rely on current HR competencies
Focus on HR activities
Typically can collect data using off-the-shelf software
Reconfigures existing data
HR owns only HR
Requires no understanding of strategy
Results in HR being managed like a commodity
HR increasingly marginalized and outsourced to low-cost vendor
Emphasizes strategic impact as performance standard
HR professional is primarily a strategic partner
Measures based on strategic relationships
Higher risk, higher return
Requires new HR competencies
Focus on business outcomes relevant to line managers
Often requires customized information technology
Requires new measures
HR shares responsibility for human capital performance with line managers
Irrelevant if not driven by strategy
Results in HR being managed like a unique strategic asset
HR not easily outsourced because contribution is firm-specific and based on more than cost control
Benchmarking Strategic metrics
SHRM Foundation 20
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Preparing the HR function for the future The debate about how HR must change its approach has been going on for some years now, but according to Deloitte and other surveys there is still room for im- provement. Further development will come from gradu- ally changing the skills profile within the function. It could be that many HR people who were recruited in the past, based on the need for a wholly different set of skills, are ill suited for HR’s evolving role.
Many may also struggle to identify and recruit others with the skills and background necessary to perform well in the new and changing environment. A two-year study, led by Professor Boudreau and completed in 2015, indi- cates that HR leaders are themselves aware of these challenges. Referring to the report’s conclusions based on interviews with 40 chief human resources officers (CHROs) and other organizational leaders, Professor Boudreau says: “The HR profession as we know it is at a tipping point, in danger of being irrelevant to unprece- dented future demands and opportunities, which can be met only by accelerating its evolution dramatically.”32
There have been various responses to this danger. Mr Charan believes that old HR and new HR are worlds apart in approach and therefore require very different, and pos- sibly irreconcilable, skills. Controversially, his view is that sep- aration would be beneficial: “One—we might call it HR-A (for administration)—would primarily manage compensa- tion and benefits…The other, HR-LO (for leadership and organization), would focus on improving the people capa- bilities of the business and would report to the CEO.”33
Some companies are looking to bring in people from outside the HR function to deal with the more busi- ness-focused, strategic segment of the work. It may be easier, so the reasoning goes, to ensure that commer- cially aware and experienced people are up to speed with HR practices. For example, according to the
32 John W. Boudreau (2015), “Reimagining HR: The Paradox of a Profession at the Tipping Point”, People + Strategy, Volume 38, issue #4, pp. 46-55.
33 Ram Charan, “It’s time to split HR”, Harvard Business Review, July 2014 (https://hbr.org/2014/07/its-time-to-split-hr)
Deloitte report, “research shows that nearly 40% of new CHROs now come from the wider business, not from HR”.
A facility for handling data goes hand in hand with this desired strategic perspective. “Confidence in HR is low,” says Cecile Alper-Leroux, vice president of innova- tion at Ultimate Software, a developer and provider of cloud-based human capital management (HCM) solutions for businesses. “However, at companies where HR uses data to make decisions consistently, HR’s credi- bility in the organization increases considerably. For ex- ample, in a recent report by Constellation Research, IN- TRUST Bank reported that using data-driven ‘predictors’ from their HCM software solution, UltiPro, they were able to make much more accurate predictions on employee flight risks. They found that the data-based predictors were more accurate than the actual managers’ predic- tions of retention risks and more realistic than actual manager assessment of high performers.”
Executives and academics interviewed for this report consistently emphasize that the new-style HR profession- al should possess a powerful combination of two skills—a head for analytics together with the ability to present findings in the manner and language convincing to sen- ior executives. “Storytelling is now a vital skill,” says Pro- fessor Boudreau. Professor Cascio agrees: “It’s critically important to use data and analysis to tell stories to exec- utives that have meaning to them.” However, the gap between current reality and ideal scenario will not be bridged overnight. A 2012 EIU survey of HR and non-HR executives conducted for KPMG, revealed that the HR function is considered to be particularly weak at “meas- urably proving the value of HR to the business” and con- tributing “insightful and predictive workforce analytics that provide understanding of the people agenda in businesses”.34 These findings are also reflected in several of our interviews (Figure 14).
34 Economist Intelligence Unit report for KPMG (2012), Rethinking Human Resources in a Changing World, https://www.kpmg.com/Global/en/ IssuesAndInsights/ArticlesPublications/hr-transformations-survey/Documents/ hr-transformations-survey-full-report.pdf)
Figure 14
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0
Don't know/Not applicable None of the above
Providing insightful and predictive workforce analytics that provide understanding of the people agenda in business
Measurably proving the value of HR to the business Preparing for a changing workforce (e.g. retiring workers)
Ensuring that succession planning is in place Supporting an increasingly virtual/flexible workforce Supporting the greater globalization of our business
Sourcing key talent globally Retaining key talent globally
Achieving operational excellence Implementing coaching and career development programs
Collaborating with senior management on our people strategy Managing Costs
Internal views of HR capabilities
Source: Economist Intelligence Unit study: Rethinking Human Resources in a Changing World, 2012.
39 35
29 26 26
25 24 24
22 22
17 15
5 2
SHRM Foundation 21
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
But if organizations do not manage to make this busi- ness case, the effect can be extremely powerful. Profes- sor Cascio cites a case involving Wawa Inc., a chain of 578 food service and convenience stores in five US Mid-Atlantic states. “They previously believed that hourly wage rates were the best predictor of turnover among retail clerks,” he says. “However, data revealed that hours worked per week were more strongly correlated with turnover. By moving from 30% full-time and 70% part-time employees to a 50/50 split, Wawa cut volun- tary turnover by 60% in four years.” The lesson, according to Professor Cascio, is that “nothing beats a within-firm story”.35
Institutionalizing data Several large companies have established small but committed teams within the HR function that focus on data analysis (see case study below, “How Google de- veloped its renowned workforce analytics team”).The purpose of these teams is not just to develop useful in- sights, but to act as a seed of further development— spreading their expertise across the function as a whole and educating the executive tier about the potential commercial impact of HR data.
“At IBM we developed an online course and face-to- face workshops to teach analytical skills, such as basic statistics, storytelling and financial acumen, to HR profes- sionals”, says Mr Ferrar of IBM Smarter Workforce. “Over a couple of years we have trained several hundreds of people.”36
This is not an attempt to turn the majority of HR people into advanced mathematical modelers, but merely to appraise them of the instruments now at their disposal and make them more comfortable with the specialist jargon of data science. “Your average HR professional is not going to become a data scientist,” says Professor Cascio. “The HR professional of the future will have to ask incisive questions, be proficient in the language and be an intelligent consumer of data.”37
But who are the new HR-focused data scientists who
35 Interview with Wayne Cascio, July 23rd 2015.
36 EIU interview with Jonathan Ferrar, July 31st 2015.
37 EIU interview with Wayne Cascio, July 23rd 2015.
can play such an important role in embedding work- force analytics and thus help the HR function in its bid to become a strategic partner to the business?
“There is a growing need for universities, professional associations and certification organizations to respond to the elevated demand for more sophisticated analyt- ics skills among HR and other leaders,” says Professor Boudreau.38 Some companies are turning to graduates of industrial and organizational psychology, with their combined ability to handle figures and think critically about human behavior.39 In the absence of sufficient numbers of people trained specifically in HR analytics, another option might be to recruit data-oriented per- sonnel from other functions. “Why not reach out to other departments and bring them into the HR function?” asks Professor Boudreau. “Why not invite people from R&D, engineering or marketing, to help analyze the data and then, just as importantly, sell the analysis to the organiza- tion’s decision-makers?” The scope to learn from other departments should not be underestimated. As Peter Louch, the founder and CEO of Vemo, a provider of workforce analytics software and consulting services, points out: “HR has been late to adopt tools that other sectors—finance, academia and marketing—have al- ready embraced.”40
Another, perhaps temporary, option is to hire the nec- essary expertise from outside. “We have some customers with no data scientists on their HR team,” says Mr Louch. “Organizations need to assess if they want an in-house data science capability, but it won’t be absolutely im- perative that they have one.” Even if the data analysis is outsourced, however, the internal HR team will still have to understand and ask the right questions at the outset, and then have the capability to understand the quanti- tative results and their ramifications for the business.
The HR function is at a crossroads. It will need imagi- native solutions to grow into this new role and persuade other leaders that it is capable of generating the peo- ple-centered insights that will have a meaningful impact on organizational performance.
38 EIU interview with John Boudreau, August 20th 2015.
39 gradPSYCH Magazine, “Hot jobs: Big-data psychologists”, January 2013 (http://www.apa.org/gradpsych/2013/01/big-data.aspx)
40 EIU interview with Peter Louch, August 18th 2015.
SHRM Foundation 22
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
CASE STUDY: How Google developed its renowned workforce analytics team
By 2006 Google had 10,000 employees and was expanding at a frenetic pace, doubling in size every year. Despite its appeal as an innovative and exciting place to work, the company’s interview process was laborious. Candidates could expect to devote many hours to the process, which sometimes lasted several weeks, before starting at the firm. Not only did the lengthy procedure frustrate candidates, but it also cost the Google employees conducting these interviews precious time, which they could otherwise have spent on their core jobs, focused on innovation and development.
The company set up an analytics team to see whether this process could be streamlined. Early research, for example, demonstrated that the optimum number of candidate interviews was four. After that juncture, the cost of taking employees away from their work outweighed the incremental benefits of further interviews.
But before the team could take full advantage of what analytics could offer, it had to make significant improvements to the collection, storage and cleanliness of the data, including information about job applicants, interviewers, interview scores, headcount per category of employee, attrition and other historical data.
The company immediately saw the potential for using all the data gathered during this successful exercise as a basis for expanding the scope of its workforce analytics team. Rebranded as “People Analytics” in 2007, the team began to investigate other areas, such as optimizing compensation practices, nudging employees to engage in healthier behaviors (from eating better to saving more for retirement), and advising business clients on the best ways to grow and develop their organizations.
Reflecting the rapid development of the company as a whole, the team’s horizons expanded still further just a year later, when Laszlo Bock, senior vice president of people operations, commissioned Google’s People and Innovation Lab (PiLab) to focus on rigorous social science research, which could serve as the foundation for future HR decisions and practices. “The team tackles questions that the business doesn’t necessarily ask us to solve for the short term, but are problems that we want to understand better for the long run, and which require a lot more time or in-depth analysis,” says Kathryn Dekas, a member of the People Analytics team. “[PiLab’s] mission is to conduct innovative research that transforms our practice, both within Google and beyond.”41 Aided by their relationships with external academics, PiLab employees set aside 25-50% of their time to generating ideas and launching research projects to solve problems.
One of PiLab’s early successes was the launch of Project Oxygen, an analytics-based assessment of management at Google (see Section IV for more details).
41 Presentation by Kathryn Dekas, ““People Analytics: Using Data to Drive HR Strategy and Action”, September 19th 2011 (https://www.youtube.com/ watch?v=l6ISTjupi5g)
SHRM Foundation 23
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
The preceding sections of this report have dealt with the driving forces of the rise of workforce analytics; the the- oretical foundation of the field; and how the HR function must change in light of its rapidly evolving role, now in- creasingly centered on strategy and analytics.
This section will focus on the actual implementation of workforce analytics, and on relevant developments within the organizational world in recent years.
It will ask which areas of HR are considered most like- ly to benefit from analytics in the future. It will examine both reactive analytics (investigating why something has happened in the past) and predictive analytics (highlighting important issues before they occur), ex- ploring the areas of HR in which investment in predictive analytics has the highest rate of return. Lastly, it will look at which types of organizations have been the quickest or most effective at developing workforce analytics, as well as offering some further examples of successes to date.
Leveraging enhanced data and analytics: Specific HR benefits Section I detailed a Tata Consultancy Services survey, in which companies across industries were asked which ar- eas of HR would derive the greatest benefits from Big Data. The majority of respondents pointed to improving retention as the area most amenable to progress. Sever- al other areas, such as “identifying the effectiveness of recruitment campaigns”, “gauging employee morale” and “determining which employees to promote”, fol- lowed closely behind.
Many of the results were closely clustered, with few areas of HR thought to have very high benefits or, on the
other hand, have very limited benefits. This once again suggests that the field is still evolving and that compa- nies are still very much at the experimentation stage. “Attrition and retention are major areas of interest in many companies,” says Mr Ferrar, who leads the analyt- ics practice for IBM Smarter Workforce. “But analytics is expanding to new areas, such as conducting risk analy- sis of labor relations, compensation optimization, social media analysis, recruitment analytics and corporate employee engagement.”
Several companies have indeed registered successes on the retention front from analytics, thus explaining its early popularity. HR practitioners at McGraw Hill Finan- cial, an American financial information and analytics company, for example, can now instantly summon up information revealing the profile of those most likely to leave the organization in the near future. The profile may involve gender, age, department, education history, specialization and other relevant details.
IBM is another company that has benefited from this particular use of analytics. “HR retention analytics is a common starting point, and we were no different at IBM,” says Mr Ferrar. “It is easy to convert into financial ROI, and most business executives see the value. I al- ways start with quick wins such as this.”42
But it may nevertheless be too early to identify any definitive trends in HR investment. In a 2015 study by Har- vard Business Review Analytics Services and Visier, more than two in three organizations had still not allocated an HR budget for analytics solutions and software.43 It could well be that of the minority which have allocated re- sources, only a few are very advanced in their thinking or implementation (Figure 15).
42 EIU interview with Jonathan Ferrar, July 31st 2015.
43 All organizations had more than 500 employees. The most commonly cited functional role among respondents was HR (18%). The majority (60%) were senior business leaders. Three-fourths of respondents were drawn from companies that operate in more than one country and 40% from companies based in North America.
Section IV: Solutions—the development and implementation of workforce analytics
SHRM Foundation 24
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Figure 15
Using predictive analytics as a competitive advantage The McGraw Hill Financial case is an example of predic- tive analytics—using data to identify the likelihood of fu- ture outcomes based on historical data. This marks a departure from statistics and reporting, which merely describe what has happened in the past.
A 2014 survey by Harvard Business Review Analytic Services of HR and other executives indicates that the use of predictive analytics is still sporadic. Just 9% of the companies surveyed said they made predictions about their workforce based on analysis, considerably lower than the 40% who said they used data reactively to in- form critical workforce decisions (Figure 16).44
However, the sphere of predictive analytics looks set to attract increasing attention over the coming years. In two EIU surveys of both HR and non-HR senior executives, one from 2012 and one from 2014, the percentage of those who said their organization’s HR function “ex- celled” at providing insightful, predictive analytics in- creased from 15% in 2012 to 23% two years later.45 As more successes emerge, further interest in predictive analytics will undoubtedly follow.
If one fertile area of predictive analytics revolves around boosting retention, another seeks to improve the quality of hires. For example, Ajinga, a recruitment solu- tions company in Greater China, helped Nielsen, a glob- al information and measurement company, to refine its hiring process in the country. Résumés in China are of notoriously poor quality, and in the absence of detailed
44 Harvard Business Review Analytic Services (HBR-AS), sponsored by Visier, HR Joins the Analytics Revolution, August 2014. One-third of respondents were HR professionals. Altogether, 80% of respondents identified themselves as managers/supervisors or higher, with 36% director level or higher. In addition, 38% came from companies with 10,000 or more employees and 50% came from enterprises with 5,000 or more employees. The geographical breakdown was roughly equal among the Americas, Asia, and Europe/ Middle East/Africa.
45 Economist Intelligence Unit (2012), “CFO perspectives: How HR can take on a bigger role in driving growth”; and Economist Intelligence Unit report for PwC (2014), Gut and Gigabytes.
information on applicants, employers have simply resort- ed to trawling the best universities for potential recruits. These graduates are thus in a highly marketable posi- tion, with those from universities with lesser standing of- ten left without suitable employment.
Nielsen suspected that there were quality applicants from other universities in China and overseas who would fit in well with the firm’s culture, but needed a way to identify and filter them. They brought in Ajinga to use an- alytics to reach a broader audience, while at the same time prioritizing “best fit” candidates. Ajinga’s analytics solutions matched Nielsen’s organizational culture and specific job requirements to the individual applicant’s personality and particular abilities.
Beecher Ashley-Brown, Ajinga’s co-founder and sen- ior vice president, claims that Nielsen saw an immediate improvement from the approach. Applicant volume in- creased four times in comparison with previous years. Offer acceptance rates rose from under 70% to over 80%, while first-year retention, a key success metric for Nielsen, went up by over 20%. 46
Varying degrees of success Which companies are at the forefront of the analytics revolution? Smaller or younger companies are clearly less able to make large-scale investments. “There is a dif- ference in how large multinationals, compared to small- er organizations, tackle analytics, given their large budgets, scale and demand for globalization,” says Pro- fessor Boudreau. “However, the fundamental goal re- mains the same for all organizations—focus on the im- portant issues and generate actionable insights where they are most pivotal.” Indeed, it could also be argued that smaller companies, despite their limited financial muscle, are unencumbered by unwieldy corporate bu-
46 EIU interview with Beecher Ashley-Brown, July 20th 2015.
Investments in workforce analytics
Source: Harvard Business Review Analytic Services.
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0
None
Outsourced workforce analytics
Hired a CHRO with a strong data and analytics background
Moved workforce analytics out of HR
Hired a CHRO with a strong business or finance background
Approved new data and analytics positions for HR
Increased funding to develop HR analytics expertise
Allocated HR budget for analytics software/solutions 30
26
21
16
9
9
6
34
Role of workforce data in decision-making
Source: HR Joins the Analytics Revolution, page 3.
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0
We analyze and make proactive predictions about our workforce
- typically via dashboards and visuals that contain predictive analytics
We rarely use data to inform workforce decisions
We analyze our workforce proactively - typically via
dashboards and visuals that are up to date and available on demand
We use data proactively - typically via operational reporting
We use data reactively - typically via ad hoc reporting -
to inform only critical workforce decisions
40
26
15
11
9
Figure 16
SHRM Foundation 25
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
reaucracy and can thus act more quickly and decisive- ly. It may also be that smaller, more entrepreneurial companies are more likely to boast younger senior ex- ecutives who tend to be more technologically savvy and instinctively drawn to data analysis.
Although size may sometimes play a role in determin- ing organizational commitment, Mr Louch of Vemo does not believe that companies from certain industries are more likely than others to use analytics. “It’s not so much a specific sector,” he says. “Rather, it’s organizations with leaders who want to be data-driven and embrace ana- lytics. It’s more cultural than sectoral.”47
Whatever the level of executive enthusiasm for the field, however, it could be that certain industries are more likely to possess employees with the requisite skills to derive the maximum benefit from analytics. A 2015 EIU survey for KPMG, Evidence-based HR, found that nearly two-thirds of respondents in the IT and technology sector (64%) expected the increasing use of data-driven in- sights in their HR function to boost profitability by more than 10% in the next three years, a substantially greater proportion than in any other sector (Figure 17).
“It was easier to integrate analytics in a firm like 3M because it is a science and engineering-based compa- ny,” says Karen B Paul, who leads the company’s global
47 EIU interview with Peter Louch, August 19th 2015.
HR measurement. “Each firm will have different strengths, but 3M’s strong science and engineering background certainly shines through in its analytics solutions.”
Google is one technology company that has at- tached great importance to workforce analytics solu- tions. One example involves its research on leadership. From its inception, the company’s culture had been highly skeptical of the power of management, thinking engineers should be spending their time on goal-orient- ed tasks rather than wasting time communicating with managers. Several years ago it decided to test its pre- conceptions by launching Project Oxygen, which asked two questions: Do managers really matter? And if so, which managers have the greatest positive impact?
The company first discovered that an individual’s sat- isfaction with his or her manager correlated with a re- duced likelihood of leaving the company, plus greater employee satisfaction in multiple areas, such as work-life balance and career development. At this point, Google set out to discover exactly what the best managers did.
The project analyzed thousands of qualitative com- ments from internal surveys, performance reviews and submissions for the company’s Great Manager Award. Its conclusion identified eight behaviors shared by high-scoring managers (Figure 18).
Expected analytics investment over the next three years
Source: KPMG Evidence-based HR, page 24.
Increase by less than 10%
No change Decrease Increase by more than 20%
Biotechnology
Increase by 11-20% No change
Increase by less than 10%
Increase by 11-20%
Increase by more than 20% Don’t Know
IT & technology
No change
Decrease Don’t Know
Increase by 11-20%
Increase by more than 20%
Healthcare
Increase by less than 10%
No change
Decrease
Increase by 11-20%
Increase by more than 20%
Financial services
Increase by less than 10%
14%
49%
10% 3% 3%
18%
49%
23%
5%
20%
40%
27%
3%
6% 10%
65%
16% 3%
28%
6% 3%
Figure 17
SHRM Foundation 26
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
In the wake of this research, teams were then asked to rate their managers on a core set of activities—such as giving actionable feedback regularly and communi- cating team goals clearly—all of which related directly to the management behaviors deemed to be most im- portant. Managers with a low score in any particular category are then given suggestions, such as taking a relevant training course, on how to improve in that par- ticular area.48
48 David A. Garvin, “How Google Sold Its Engineers on Management”, Harvard Business Review, December 2013 (https://hbr.org/2013/12/how-google-sold- its-engineers-on-management)
“Project Oxygen revolutionized the way Google thought of managers,” says Brian Welle, director of peo- ple analytics at Google. “Not only did managers matter, but managerial ability wasn’t static. The same manag- er’s results could fluctuate from one survey to the next, and thus kept everyone focused on maintaining their performance.”49
Google’s successes have led to further investment in the field. Indeed, the companies that will inevitably be the most responsive to the idea of workforce analytics are those that have derived clear commercial benefits as a result of the practice.
Some of the most powerful results have arisen from the interaction between employee and customer data. “Evidence-based analysis is not just about determining how well people are performing,” says Mr Ferrar at IBM. “It can also calculate how the performance of the peo- ple links to the consumer brand, establishing and meas- uring that link between employee, customer and reve- nue. This interplay really captures C-suite attention.” (See the McDonald’s case study below).
It is results such as these that lead to the virtuous cy- cle—measurable results spark executive attention, which leads to increased investment, which spurs more results and more investment.
49 EIU interview with Brian Welle, August 14th 2015.
1. Is a good coach
2. Empowers the team and does not micromanage
3. Expresses interest in and concern for team members’ successes and personal well-being
4. Is productive and results-oriented
5. Is a good communicator - listens and shares information
6. Helps with career development
7. Has a clear vision and strategy for the team
8. Has key technical skills that help him or her advise the team
What Google’s best managers do
Source: HBR - How Google Sold Its Engineers on Management.
A good manager…
Figure 18
SHRM Foundation 27
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Successful examples of workforce analytics implementation Example 1: Age and business performance A 2009 study conducted by Lancaster University Management School, which looked at more than 400 McDonald’s restaurants in the UK, found that employees aged over 60 had a major impact on the company’s business performance. The research showed that levels of customer satisfaction were on average 20% higher in restaurants that employed at least one worker over 60. “The research clearly demonstrates the very real business value of recruiting an age-diverse workforce,” says Professor Paul Sparrow, director of the Centre for Performance-Led HR at Lancaster University. “For McDonald’s, we can show that the presence of older employees improves customer satisfaction, and in a service-led business such as theirs, this satisfaction drives the bottom line. Mature employees are a key part of the performance recipe. This is good news for the workforce given the changing demographics of our society.”50
Incidentally, this case highlights one of several ethical and legal issues raised by workforce analytics (discussed further in Section V). If HR data reveal that better performers are of a certain age, live in a certain area or come from a certain ethnic group, how should companies use this information while still complying with the law?
Example 2: Mirroring customer diversity through workforce planning Kaiser Permanente is an integrated health insurer, hospital and medical service provider with more than 64,000 employees in Northern California alone. In 2007 the company’s research discovered that the ethnic makeup of the company’s workforce did not reflect the wider population. For example, in the Central Valley area in California 37% of the population was Hispanic, compared with only 27% of its workforce. Meanwhile, its membership in the area was 24% Hispanic.51
The company saw a commercial opportunity. Matching the ethnic makeup of its staff to the broader population could improve business performance. “Changing demographics dictate that diversity considerations play a significant role in how we deliver care,” said George Halvorson, CEO of the company from 2002 to 2013. “Being culturally competent as caregivers helps us to both serve existing members and attract new ones.”52
Kaiser Permanente believes that its subsequent systematic focus to attract, develop, retain and deploy diverse talents has given it a major competitive advantage over its rivals. Workforce analytics plays a critical role in this whole process, forecasting the ethnic composition of particular regions and any relevant shortfall in their existing workforce. By 2013 the company was reporting that more than 11,000 of its employees and physicians were able to dispense care and service in more than one language.53
Example 3: Boosting government efficiency through analytics The 2007-09 recession hit Houston, Texas as it did all cities in the United States. City leaders were forced to cut budgets and make many difficult decisions about layoffs. In going through this process, they realized that they did not have sufficient information about labor costs and work schedules necessary to make key budget decisions.
The city asked Kronos, a workforce management software and services company, to implement workforce analytics, employee scheduling and absence management software solutions for its 24,000 employees in all its various departments.
The initiative produced several benefits. First and foremost, the human capital portion of the city’s budget is now much more transparent and can thus be controlled more easily. Managers and employees are more aware of how much time they have worked, allowing for better management of vacation days and overtime. For example, a telephone application was devised to enable parks and recreation crews to call in at the start and end of their day. There is also greater precision in several areas, such as payroll calculations and costing for projects and grants.
The resulting efficiencies have saved the city an estimated US$7.2m annually, as well as enabling a more effective deployment of staff for the benefit of Houston’s inhabitants.54
50 The Telegraph, “Workers over 60 are surprise key to McDonald’s sales”, August 13th 2009 (http://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/newsbysector/ retailandconsumer/6017391/Workers-over-60-are-surprise-key-to-McDonalds-sales.html)
51 “Increasing Diversity and Cultural Competency in the Central Valley”, presentation by Laura Long, workforce consultant at Kaiser Permanente, February 4th 2011 (www.calhospital.org/sites/main/files/file.../Kaiser_Permanente.ppt)
52 Talent Management, “CEOs who lead the way”, September 11th 2008 (http://www.talentmgt.com/articles/ceos-who-lead-the-way)
53 Kaiser Permanente, Annual Report 2013 (http://share.kaiserpermanente.org/static/kp_annualreport_2013/#diverse-populations)
54 IDC Government Insights “City of Houston: Transparency, Efficiency, and Accuracy Through Workforce Management”, 2011 (http://www.kronos.com/ download/thank-you.aspx?did=14770&rr=0&LangType=1033#)
SHRM Foundation 28
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Workforce analytics will certainly encounter some bumps in the road. Successful business results from the use of analytics will do much to garner the necessary support for surmounting these obstacles, while also leading to further investment.
This section looks at some of the obstacles that cur- rently stand in the way of the development of workforce analytics, as well as common pitfalls that trip up organi- zations looking to expand the role of data in HR.
Lingering skepticism One potential obstacle to further investment in work- force analytics may be a residual mistrust about the HR function among a significant minority of senior execu- tives. In a 2012 EIU survey, for example, one-third of CEOs and almost one-half of CFOs believed that HR does not have a good understanding of the people needs of their business. If this trust is absent, then executives are more likely to believe that workforce analytics, conduct- ed by HR, will not meet its desired goals.55
As HR increases its successful use of workforce analyt- ics, this perception is likely to change. “It can be difficult for HR to establish credibility,” says Ms Alper-Leroux of Ultimate Software. “The good news is that when HR uses data consistently to make decisions, their credibility in the organization is greatly enhanced.” Indeed, the field of workforce analytics offers a genuine opportunity to register accomplishments which have a major positive impact on the business.
Skills gap As with all functions, HR will need to become better equipped to handle and analyze data than is currently the case (see Figure 19). That doesn’t mean that HR practitioners need to become data scientists. But in a more data-centered world they will certainly need to understand general statistical analysis and be able to
55 Economist Intelligence Unit, “CFO perspectives: How HR can take on a bigger role in driving growth”, 2012 (http://www.oracle.com/us/c-central/ cfo-solutions/eiu-ibm-oracle-cfo-report-1877303.pdf)
transmit findings in a way that business leaders relate to. “More schools are now offering introductory courses as well as graduate programs in business analytics,” notes Professor Cascio. “HR professionals and students who as- pire to work in this field should avail themselves of oppor- tunities to become familiar with the language and the methods of business analytics.”56
Figure 19
The analytics team will play a key part in this process, not just unearthing insights but also helping to educate the rest of the HR department. However, it is doubtful wheth- er the supply of data scientists, be it in HR or in other functions, can meet demand. A 2011 McKinsey report estimated that by 2018 the United States alone could face a shortage of 140,000-190,000 people with “deep analytical skills”, as well as a deficit of 1.5m managers and analysts with the know-how to use the analysis of Big Data to make effective decisions (Figure 20).57
56 EIU interview with Wayne Cascio, July 23rd 2015.
57 McKinsey (2011), “Big data: The next frontier for innovation, competition, and productivity” http://www.mckinsey.com/insights/business_technology/ big_data_the_next_frontier_for_innovation
Biggest obstacles to achieving better use of data, metrics and analysis
Source: Harvard Business Review Analytic Services, HR Joins the Analytics Revolution, page 6
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0
HR does not know how to talk about HR data to relate it to
business outcomes
Lack of support or expectations by C-suite executives
Lack of perceived value of a data-driven culture; company
does not have a data-driven culture
Lack of adequate investment in necessary HR/talent
analytical systems
Lack of analytic acumen or skills among HR professionals
Inaccurate, inconsistent, or hard-to-access data requiring
too much manual manipulation 54%
47%
44%
37%
29%
27%
Section V: Challenges, obstacles and pitfalls in the implementation of workforce analytics
SHRM Foundation 29
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Figure 20
Because of these shortages, data scientists command high salaries. According to the O’Reilly Media Data Sci- ence Salary Survey, their median annual salary in the United States in 2014 was US$144,000.58 This payoff drives more people into the field as universities scramble to of- fer curriculums that equip students with potentially lucra- tive skills for the information economy. A 2015 Bloomb- erg Businessweek article noted: “30 new data science programs in North America, either up and running or in the works; the University of Virginia began offering a master’s in 2014, as did Stanford.”59
Avoiding common pitfalls when using analytics To ensure a successful outcome, organizations should follow these suggestions to avoid common pitfalls when using analytics:
Connect analytics with business needs Organizations must learn to feel comfortable with data, but what is even more important is having knowledge of the business itself. It is crucial to first identify the business needs and then tie the research directly to those issues that genuinely affect the organization’s performance. Companies today are overwhelmed by data, so it is im- portant to clarify first what will and what will not be measured. Experts continually warn against aimless analysis of data, emphasizing instead that each piece of research should be astutely directed, asking a specif- ic question that the organization needs answering. Al- though the organization collects a variety of data, not
58 Forbes, “2014 Data Science Salary Survey”, December 5th 2014 http://www. forbes.com/sites/oreillymedia/2014/12/05/2014-data-science-salary-survey/
59 Bloomberg Businessweek, “Help Wanted: Black Belts in Data”, June 4th 2015 http://www.bloomberg.com/news/articles/2015-06-04/help-wanted-black- belts-in-data
all of them will be relevant. The desired business out- comes should drive the analytics.
“A fundamental principle applies to all workforce an- alytics,” says Professor Boudreau. “There must always be a decent chance that the information you are trying to collect and analyze will correct a costly business error. Always keeping this principle front of mind implies pur- pose, something organizations too often lose sight of.” A 2014 Visier survey of 300 US-based companies found that the greatest business barrier to the successful implemen- tation of workforce analytics was “an unclear connec- tion between workforce analytics and results”.60
Organize and clean the data61
While it need not be perfect, the information must at least be available and decipherable if the research is to be effective. Many large and well-established compa- nies have only recently begun to compile their work- force data in an organized manner. “When I first started working at Google in 2006, one of our top priorities was to collect clean data and store it in a way that we could easily retrieve and analyze it,” says Dr Welle, director of people analytics at the company. “We spent a year getting a handle on this, and that was our first major achievement.”
If deemed necessary, an array of external compa- nies, large and small, are now on hand to offer assis- tance with data storage solutions, as well as in tackling subsequent projects.
Avoid faulty logic and perfectionism Organizations can easily run into trouble when they con- fuse correlation with causation in research results. For example, if data show that older sales representatives sell more than their younger colleagues, that doesn’t necessarily mean that age is the cause. It could be that the older workers have received more training or get more referrals, and these are the true drivers of higher sales.
Another potential issue is failing to account for time when examining measurements. For example, if analysis focuses only on the present, then it might appear that providing training is a bad idea because it costs money and will lower profits today. However, when the time ho- rizon is expanded, the increased capabilities and em- ployee engagement generated may actually increase profits.
Another obstacle can be procrastination caused by the fear of imperfect data. Organizations don’t need complete assurance that measurements are totally ac-
60 Visier, 2014 Survey Report—The State of Workforce Analytics and Planning http://www.visier.com/lp/2014-survey-report-the-state-of-workforce- analytics-and-planning/
61 Data cleaning is defined here as the process of amending or removing data in a database that are incorrect, incomplete, improperly formatted or duplicated.
Supply and demand of deep analytical talent by 2018 (Thousands of people)
Source: McKinsey, Big data: the next frontier for innovation, competition and productivity, page 11.
(a) Other supply drivers include attrition (-), immigration (+), and reemploying previously unemployed deep analytical talent (+).
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
Lower EstimateActualUpper Estimate
2018 projected demand
Talent gap
2018 supply
Others (a)Graduates with deep analytical
talent
2008 Employment
150 180
30
300
190
490 440
140 30
SHRM Foundation 30
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
curate before embarking on a project. “HR’s constitu- ents often demand precision in the numbers before they will use them,” explains Professor Boudreau. “On the face of it, this seems logical, but in practice it can lead to paralysis, because no numbers are ever perfectly pre- cise. The disciplines of finance and marketing have sys- tems to work with imperfect numbers, as should HR.”62
Start small Once the first building block of gathering and cleaning the data has been put in place, organizations should first take on simple projects and execute them well to gain organizational buy-in. “Starting small is critical”, says Mr Ashley-Brown of Ajinga. “Find opportunities where Big Data initiatives can provide the user and senior leader- ship with value, and then expand from there.”63
Establish cross-functional co-operation A lot of relevant information may reside in depart-
ments outside HR. For analytics to be effective, all func- tions (such as finance, marketing and sales) will need to co-operate in data gathering and analysis, and in inte- grating the systems where the data are stored. Establish- ing consistent IT systems across the organization, as well as cross-functional teams to collaborate on data gath- ering and analysis, will go a long way toward ensuring that this obstacle is overcome.
Cultural barriers Workforce analytics will be implemented by people. It is inevitable, therefore, that personal insecurities and poli- tics, which appear in every organization, will be evident in this field too. Although these cultural factors may slow the pace of the data revolution, they will not stop it.
Many executives still make decisions based on gut in- stinct. But evidence can quickly expose fallacies in such judgment, thus potentially undermining the reputation of highly paid and respected executives. In other words, analytics can be viewed as a threat.
This fear is, however, based on an erroneous assump- tion. Evidence should be seen as an aid, not a replace- ment. Executives still have to make decisions. The only difference now is that they have more data at their dis- posal to boost their chances of deciding wisely. “Senior managers have to allow data to change their opinions,” says Professor Cascio. “However, data alone cannot substitute for good judgment.”64
The perceived threat exists on another level too. Many HR professionals may feel a sense of trepidation that reliance on data will render their skills irrelevant and endanger their livelihood. “There is a quiet resistance to analytics, which comes from a concern that their role is being usurped by data,” says Mr Louch of Vemo. “They
62 EIU interview with John Boudreau, August 20th 2015.
63 EIU interview with Beecher Ashley-Brown, July 20th 2015.
64 Interview with Wayne Cascio, July 23rd 2015.
are asking themselves: “If I’m supposed to spend a lot of my time working on analytics, does that mean I need to be a statistician?”65 But according to Professor Cascio, this concern also emanates from a misguided appre- hension. All functions within an organization need to feel comfortable with data, but that in no way means that other skills they have developed are now redundant.
Ethical questions The Big Data era brings with it issues of ethics and priva- cy, the ramifications of which organizations and society have not yet fully confronted. Employers now have the ability to pick up all sorts of personal information about employees and candidates, but do they have the right to do so?
How much information about an employee should an organization track without going beyond what seems acceptable? Should an organization, for example, try to establish a correlation between performance and phys- ical activity by measuring the distance each employee walks each day? And will companies act unethically or shoddily in response to the conclusions of their analyt- ics? Will they, for example, neglect those employees deemed by analytics to be more likely to jump ship to another organization?
Close tracking of consumer behavior has raised the hackles of many, but linking employees’ livelihood to monitoring (and candidates’ job prospects to research findings about their personal details), in a process that they might not even be aware of, seems to cross the boundary of acceptable ethical practice. In some in- stances and in some jurisdictions, the legality of such an exercise may even be called into question.
Laws on monitoring, while still not yet fully developed in this new field, favor the employer more in some places than in others. In the United States, for example, collect- ing personal information about employees is generally seen as legitimate, as long as the employer can cite non-discriminatory, legitimate business purposes. In the European Union, however, the onus is on employers to justify why they need to collect personal data from their employees.66 In Canada, too, it is illegal for an employ- er to monitor employees’ private emails unless the seri- ousness of an alleged offence overrides the right to pri- vacy.67 In Japan, meanwhile, personal information about applicants must be collected directly from appli- cants or from third parties with the applicant’s consent. Collection of sensitive personal information without ex-
65 EIU interview with Peter Louch, August 19th 2015.
66 Miriam Wugmeister, “Comparing the U.S. and EU Approach to Employee Privacy”, Morrison Foerster, February 29th 2008 (http://www.mofo.com/ resources/publications/2008/02/comparing-the-us-and-eu-approach-to- employee-pri__)
67 The Globe and Mail, “Supreme Court rules employees have right to privacy on work computers”, October 19th 2012 (http://www.theglobeandmail. com/news/national/supreme-court-rules-employees-have-right-to-privacy- on-work-computers/article4625660/)
SHRM Foundation 31
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
press consent is generally prohibited. But even when legal boundaries are not clearly
crossed, there is still an ethical principle at stake. “Cer- tain ways of measuring employees can seem uncom- fortable, even creepy, to many people,” says Professor Boudreau, “Watching employees too closely, observing what they eat in the cafeteria, scrutinizing their lifestyle choices just to come up with an algorithm on how they can be most productive. But it’s a fascinating social question: what are the trade-offs companies and socie- ty are prepared to accept in the pursuit of efficien- cy?”68
Mr Ferrar believes that openness is the antidote to ac- cusations of ethical transgression and crude invasion of personal space. “Legislation is straightforward, but eth- ics are more complicated,” he says. “Organizations will need to be transparent and explain the data they are collecting, the objective of data collection, and how the analysis will be used, especially what the benefits will be for the company and its workers.”69
The social media landscape is particularly conten- tious. Increasingly, employers are checking whether their workers are making disparaging remarks about the organization on Facebook, Twitter and other sites. Close scrutiny of candidates’ social media activities are even more common. A 2014 survey by CareerBuilder, the on- line recruitment resource, found that 43% of employers were using social networking sites to research job candi- dates.70 Around half (51%) of those organizations that did research job candidates on social media said they had found content that prevented them from hiring candidates, such as evidence of drug use or making de- rogatory comments about a former employer.
Some argue that this research is justified, that employ- ers can limit the potential reputational damage wrought
68 https://hbr.org/2014/09/predict-what-employees-will-do-without-freaking- them-out
69 EIU interview with Jonathan Ferrar, 31st July 2015.
70 CareerBuilder, “Number of Employers Passing on Applicants Due to Social Media Posts Continues to Rise, According to New CareerBuilder Survey”, June 26th 2014 (http://www.careerbuilder.co.uk/share/aboutus/ pressreleasesdetail. aspx?sd=6%2F26%2F2014&id=pr829&ed=12%2F31%2F2014)
by employees criticizing the organization in a public fo- rum. Others claim that it amounts to unnecessary snoop- ing, and that excellent job candidates can be excluded for private behavior unrelated to their work or for politi- cal or religious beliefs.
It will take some time before organizations fully com- prehend the fallout from the ethical questions surround- ing employee privacy and formulate a coherent re- sponse. Several of the other challenges, too, will be no less exacting and will need to be addressed head-on as organizations enter the virtually uncharted but exciting territory of workforce analytics.
Overcoming obstacles: A checklist
l Improve the analytical skills of the HR function
l Ensure data are clean, organized and ready for analysis
l Keep projects focused on solving a key business problem
l Maintain rigor: don’t confuse correlation and causation
l Strike a balance: perfectionism is a drawback
l Seek small wins at first; they will lead to bigger ones
l Establish cross-functional co-operation for data gathering, storage and analysis
l Reassure staff that analytics is an aid to human decision-making, not a replacement
l Understand the legal and ethical complexities of employee monitoring
SHRM Foundation 32
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
SHRM Foundation 33
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Using analytics correctly is not as easy as it appears. Or- ganizations must proceed carefully to reap the benefits of this new tool. While some organizations may be more advanced than others, the trend is clear: workforce an- alytics is here to stay, and its growth is inevitable.
Progress may be slowed by logistical or cultural obsta- cles, but in a world where data are plentiful, available and amenable to sophisticated analysis, it won’t be stalled outright. Analyzing the impact of various people management practices on business outcomes and overall performance has too much potential to be ig- nored.
Although the future of the field seems assured, it is not certain that the HR function will be leading it. However, HR needs to be involved to bring the correct context and people knowledge to the analysis. At this point, HR still has work to do to develop the necessary skills, to
identify organizational needs, and to learn how to ap- proach workforce analytics in an effective way.
Throughout this report we have stressed the impor- tance of establishing a virtuous cycle. Small analytics projects that lead to positive outcomes will boost both future investments and the credibility of the HR function, thus making further success possible. And once major achievements are registered, strong management sup- port for the increased use of people analytics will be more likely. If one organization derives genuine compet- itive advantage from workforce analytics, others will fol- low its lead.
Indeed, what we have witnessed to date—several progressive companies establishing small teams of HR-focused data scientists—may be just the first phase of a transformative analytics revolution.
Conclusion
SHRM Foundation 34
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Bass, Dina and Rodrigo Orihuela, “Help Wanted: Black Belts in Data”, Bloomberg Businessweek, June 4th 2015 (http://www. bloomberg.com/news/articles/2015-06-04/help-wanted-black-belts-in-data)
Becker, Brian and Mark Huselid, “Measuring HR? Benchmarking is Not the Answer!”, HR Magazine, December 2003 (http:// markhuselid.com/pdfs/articles/2003%20Becker-Huselid%20HR%20Magazine.pdf)
Bersin, Josh, Karen O’Leonard and Wendy Wang-Audia, High-Impact Talent Analytics: Building a World-Class HR Measurement and Analytics Function, Bersin by Deloitte, October 7th 2013 (http://www.bersin.com/Practice/Detail.aspx?id=16909)
Bersin, Josh, “Big Data in Human Resources: A World of Haves and Have-Nots”, Forbes, October 7th 2013 (http://www.forbes. com/sites/joshbersin/2013/10/07/big-data-in-human-resources-a-world-of-haves-and-have-nots/)
Bersin, Josh, The Datafication of HR. Deloitte University Press, Deloitte Review, Issue 14, January 17th 2014 (http://dupress.com/ articles/dr14-datafication-of-hr/)
Bolton, Robert and Mark Spears, Evidence-based HR. KPMG Advisory Institute with the Economist Intelligence Unit, May 4th 2015 (http://www.kpmg-institutes.com/institutes/advisory-institute/articles/2015/05/evidence-based-hr.html)
Boudreau, John W., “Reimagining HR: The Paradox of a Profession at the Tipping Point”, People + Strategy, 38.4 (2015): pp. 46-55
Boudreau, John W. and Peter M. Ramstad, Beyond HR. Boston, MA: Harvard Business Publishing, 2007
CareerBuilder, “Number of Employers Passing on Applicants Due to Social Media Posts Continues to Rise, According to New CareerBuilder Survey”, June 26th 2014 (http://www.careerbuilder.co.uk/share/aboutus/pressreleasesdetail. aspx?sd=6%2F26%2F2014&id=pr829&ed=12%2F31%2F2014)
Carlson, Kevin D. and Michael J. Kavanagh, HR Metrics and Workforce Analytics. Sage Publishing, 2014 (http://www.sagepub. com/sites/default/files/upm-binaries/41672_6.pdf)
Cascio, Wayne and John Boudreau, Investing in People. Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Pearson Education, 2011
Charan, Ram, “It’s time to split HR”, Harvard Business Review, July 2014 (https://hbr.org/2014/07/its-time-to-split-hr)
Coco, Cedric T., Fiona Jamison and Heather Black, “Connecting People Investments and Business Outcomes at Lowe’s”, People & Strategy 34.2 (2011): pp. 28-33 http://c.ymcdn.com/sites/www.hrps.org/resource/collection/86D817D1-E244-4847- A103-BC7E19E57AB6/HRPS_PS34-2_Final.pdf
Cooperstein, Grant and Jeff Higgins, Managing an Organization’s Biggest Cost: The Workforce, Human Capital Management Institute (http://www.hcminst.com/files/OrgPlus_Total_Cost_Workforce_.pdf)
Davenport, Thomas H., Jeanne Harris and Jeremy Shapiro, “Competing on talent analytics”, Harvard Business Review, October 2010 https://hbr.org/2010/10/competing-on-talent-analytics
Dekas, Kathryn, “People Analytics: Using Data to Drive HR Strategy and Action”, Presentation, Strata Jumpstart, New York, NY, September 19th 2011 (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=l6ISTjupi5g)
Economist Intelligence Unit, interview with Beecher Ashley-Brown, July 20th 2015
Economist Intelligence Unit, interview with John Boudreau, July 30th 2015
Economist Intelligence Unit, interview with Wayne Cascio, July 23rd 2015
Economist Intelligence Unit, interview with Jonathan Ferrar, July 31st 2015
Economist Intelligence Unit, interview with Peter Louch, August 18th 2015
Economist Intelligence Unit, Interview with Karen B. Paul, August 13th 2015
Bibliography
SHRM Foundation 35
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Economist Intelligence Unit, interview with Brian Welle, August 14th 2015
Economist Intelligence Unit report for IBM and Oracle, CFO perspectives: How HR can take on a bigger role in driving growth, 2012 (http://www.oracle.com/us/c-central/cfo-solutions/eiu-ibm-oracle-cfo-report-1877303.pdf)
Economist Intelligence Unit report for PwC, Gut and Gigabytes, 2014 (http://www.economistinsights.com/sites/default/files/ Gut_%26_gigabytes_Capitalising_on_the_art_%26_science_in_decision_making.pdf)
Filipkowski, Jenna, Insightful HR: Integrating Quality Data for Better Talent Decisions, Human Capital Institute in partnership with Oracle, April 28th 2015 (http://pcdn4.hci.org/files/field_content_file/2015%20Oracle.pdf)
Garvin, David A., “How Google Sold its Engineers on Management”, Harvard Business Review, December 2013 (https://hbr. org/2013/12/how-google-sold-its-engineers-on-management)
Harvard Business Review Analytic Services (HBR-AS), sponsored by Visier, HR Joins the Analytics Revolution, August 2014 (https://hbr.org/resources/pdfs/comm/visier/18765_HBR_Visier_Report_July2014.pdf)
Harvard Business Review Analytic Services and Visier, via Bersin, Demand for HR Analytics Roles Strong, but Slowing, May 17th 2015 (http://www.bersin.com/blog/post/Demand-for-HR-Analytics-Roles-Remains-Strong2c-but-Slowing.aspx)
Hastie, Trevor, Robert Tibshirani and Jerome Friedman, The Elements of Statistical Learning. New York, NY: Springer New York Inc., 2001
Huselid, Mark A., “The impact of human resource management practices on turnover, productivity and corporate financial performance”, Academy of Management Journal, 1995, Vol. 38, No. 3, pp. 635-872
Huselid, Mark A., Brian E. Becker and Dave Ulrich, The HR Scorecard: Linking People, Strategy, and Performance. Boston, MA: Harvard Business Review Press, 2001
Huselid, Mark A., Brian E. Becker and Richard W. Beatty, The Workforce Scorecard: Managing Human Capital to Execute Strategy. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Publishing, 2005
Huselid, Mark A., Brian Becker and Richard Beatty, The Differentiated Workforce: Transforming Talent into Strategic Impact. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Publishing, 2009
IDC Government Insights, via Kronos, “City of Houston: Transparency, Efficiency, and Accuracy through Workforce Management”, August 2011 (http://www.kronos.com/showAbstract.aspx?id=14770&rr=0&LangType=1033&ecid=ABEA- 56V1K5)
Kaiser Permanente, Kaiser Permanente Annual Report 2013 (http://share.kaiserpermanente.org/static/kp_annualreport_2013/)
Kaplan, Robert S. and David P. Norton, The Balanced Scorecard. Boston, MA: Harvard Business Review Press, 1996
King, John, “2014 Data Science Salary Survey”, Forbes, December 5th 2014 (http://www.forbes.com/sites/ oreillymedia/2014/12/05/2014-data-science-salary-survey/)
KPMG-Economist Intelligence Unit, Rethinking Human Resources in a Changing World, 2012 (https://www.kpmg.com/Global/ en/IssuesAndInsights/ArticlesPublications/hr-transformations-survey/Documents/hr-transformations-survey-full-report.pdf)
Krajewski, Lee J. and Howard E. Thompson, Management Science: Quantitative Methods in Context. Hoboken: John Wiley and Sons Inc., 1981
Levenson, Alec, Using Targeted Analytics to Improve Talent Decisions, Center for Effective Organizations, January 2011 (http:// ceo.usc.edu/pdf/G11-03.pdf)
Long, Laura, “Increasing Diversity and Cultural Competency in the Central Valley”, Presentation, California Hospital Association Workforce Coalition Meeting, February 4th 2011 (http://www.calhospital.org/sites/main/files/file-attachments/ Kaiser_Permanente.ppt)
Makin, Kirk, “Supreme Court rules employees have right to privacy on work computers”, The Globe and Mail, October 19th 2012 (http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/national/supreme-court-rules-employees-have-right-to-privacy-on-work- computers/article4625660/)
Manyika, James et al., Big data: The next frontier for innovation, competition, and productivity, McKinsey Global Institute, May 2011 (http://www.mckinsey.com/insights/business_technology/big_data_the_next_frontier_for_innovation)
PwC, 15th Annual Global CEO Survey, 2012 (https://www.pwc.com/gx/en/ceo-survey/pdf/15th-global-pwc-ceo-survey.pdf)
SHRM Foundation 36
Use of Workforce Analytics for Competitive Advantage
Schatsky, David and Jeff Schwartz, Global Human Capital Trends 2015, Deloitte University Press (http://d2mtr37y39tpbu. cloudfront.net/wp-content/uploads/2015/08/DUP_GlobalHumanCapitalTrends2015.pdf)
Talent Management Diversity Executive Staff, “CEOs Who Lead the Way”, Talent Management, September 11th 2008 (http:// www.talentmgt.com/articles/ceos-who-lead-the-way)
Tata Consultancy Services, The Emerging Big Returns of Big Data, 2013 (http://www.tcs.com/SiteCollectionDocuments/ Trends_Study/TCS-Big-Data-Global-Trend-Study-2013.pdf)
Tyler, Richard, “Workers over 60 are surprise key to McDonald’s sales”, The Telegraph, August 13th 2009 (http://www.telegraph. co.uk/finance/newsbysector/retailandconsumer/6017391/Workers-over-60-are-surprise-key-to-McDonalds-sales.html)
Visier, 2014 Survey Report—The State of Workforce Analytics and Planning (http://www.visier.com/lp/2014-survey-report-the- state-of-workforce-analytics-and-planning/)
Voelker, Rebecca, “Hot jobs: Big-data psychologists”, gradPSYCH Magazine, January 2013 (http://www.apa.org/ gradpsych/2013/01/big-data.aspx)
Wugmeister, Miriam, Comparing the U.S. and EU Approach to Employee Privacy, Morrison Foerster, February 29th 2008 (http:// www.mofo.com/resources/publications/2008/02/comparing-the-us-and-eu-approach-to-employee-pri__
www.ibm.com/kenexatalentinsights
IBM® Kenexa® Talent Insights Apply analytics to any workforce challenge using any HR data from any source.
IBM® Kenexa® Talent Insights, powered by Watson Analytics, uses any HR data to deliver data-driven answers to workforce questions. Only IBM combines cognitive analytics with deep HR expertise to deliver a powerful, yet easy to use talent analytics solution.
IBM, the IBM logo, ibm.com, and the planet icon are trademarks of International Business Machines Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml. © International Business Machines Corporation 2016.
How quickly can your HR organization answer these workforce questions?
How many people have we hired in the last three months and from what source?
Which agencies are producing our best candidates?
What is the average tenure by critical role?
What are the key drivers contributing to attrition?
What roles ranked highest in job satisfaction?
What are the average sales of my most engaged units?
ABOUT THE SHRM FOUNDATION
At the SHRM Foundation, we are a catalyst for
thought leadership. We help predict where the
workforce is headed because we’ve been studying
its evolution for over 40 years. Our mission is to
offer unmatched human capital knowledge for the
benefit of professional organization leaders with
a total focus on studying and reporting the
management practices that work. Supporting the
Foundation is a chance to contribute to an ongoing
study about the direction of human resources in
society. A 501(c)(3) nonprofit affiliate of the Society
for Human Resource Management (SHRM), the
SHRM Foundation is governed by a volunteer board
of directors, comprising distinguished HR academic
and practice leaders. Contributions to the SHRM
Foundation are tax-deductible. For more information,
contact the SHRM Foundation at (703) 535-6020.
Online at shrmfoundation.org.
16-0287
sponsored by: